Home

Buick 1999 Automobile User Manual

1. 0 004 6 52 Special Problems 0 00 00 ee eee 6 50 NIRE 6 49 Tir s rh eieae ee ine ERR UE CP IUE NP RO RP 6 54 bn pP 6 50 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 51 yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Climate Control Steering Wheel Touch Control 3 11 Climate Control System 0 0 00 000000 3 2 Clock Setting the 00 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 12 Comholder ise rua hase reete dene Oe 2 51 Comfort Controls secs 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 2 Compact Disc Care 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 35 Compact Disc Player 00 3 21 3 25 Cale seers cients e he b oad ex ER a hes Feet 3 35 BEIEOISS sepe ka esame ace 3 23 3 29 Compact Spare Tire 0 cece eee eee ves 5 32 Console Storage 2 0 cece ce cee eee eee 2 51 Control of a Vehicle 0 0 cerei eee eee eee 4 6 Convenience Net 0 000 e eee eee eee ee 2 52 Convex Outside Mirror 0 00 00 0000e 2 50 Coolant sesse ceo gases e E EET CERE 6 22 Heater Engine 0 0 cece eee eee 2 23 Recovery Tank sis ern e Ree n 5 14 Cooling System i cesceee Lese ce Re EA cas 5 12 Comering Lamps 000 rass cece cnn he 2 41 Courtesy Lamps csse eet erm ehem 2 43 Courtesy Transportation 0 0 0 0 eee eee 8 7 Cruls LL Les eg ERG ee P E dev be TR AG eer 2 69 Cruise Control 0 2 eee eese 2 37 Cupholders i nd dee ce ihe ie ceste
2. 8 3 Appearance Care Materials Chart 6 56 Blizzard 1 eee eee eee eee eee ete 4 27 Arbitration Program 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 8 3 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Brake Adjusttnefit 21 cse ERCEFORTe Re mex E UE 6 30 Anti lock System Warning Light 2 62 4 7 PLUG aos lt Satie dom ew dod urget eae saeco 6 27 Master Cylinder voee RR Ree RES 6 27 Parking eei teo di bk lotus abide en ai n 2 27 Pedal Travel eere ne EEEE EE 6 30 Replacing System Parts 000 6 30 System Warning Light 005 2 61 poll 4 35 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check 2 24 7 35 Weal seasga 4 seks behets Een dee Ota wae eave 6 29 Brakes Anti Lock eeeeeee e 4 7 Brakillg 2 pecie sedet ueber ado pre pp ate ab nee 4 6 Braking in Emergencies sls eese eese 4 10 Break In New Vehicle llseeeees 2 19 Brightness Control 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 2 43 BIST Check 422523 Re px AO 2 24 1 35 Bulb Replacement eeseeeeeeeeeeeee 6 31 Canadian Roadside Assistance 0 000 8 6 Capacities and Specifications 000 6 64 Carbon Monoxide 2 15 2 33 2 34 4 28 4 35 Cassette Deck Service 0 0 cece eee ee eee 7 33 Cassette Tape Player 3 17 3 21 3 25 Cate ens pre bRE WR SERE
3. 0 0000 5 29 6 64 Towing Recreational Vehicle 000 0 e eee eee 4 29 TAM Si 9 o oe RR PC vera ded Sais CURE TEE 4 32 Your Vehicles es rae or Ree eon en aaa 5 8 Traction Control System 6 0 eee eee 4 9 Control System Warning Light 2 63 4 9 Off Warning Light 0 0000000005 4 9 yellow blue Trailer Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Brakes siiis eter pe RYE rk dbase 4 35 Turn Signal Front Bulb Replacement Driving on Grades 0 0 0 0 0c lesse 4 37 Turn Signal On Chime Driving With iere drap erae dicet En 4 36 Turn Signal Rear Bulb Replacement Engine Cooling When Towing 4 38 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Hitches TT 4 35 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Maintenance When Towing 00 4 38 Twilight Sentinel Parking on Hills sccsscsec riere eirerii niaii 4 37 Tongue Weight 9000002002 LTT 434 Underbody Flushing Service Total Weight on Tires 0 eee e eee eee eee 4 35 Underbody Maintenance TOWING rm 4 32 Universal Theft Deterrent Turn S1enals aenaran ee R eee e 4 37 V otn HP 4 33 n Transaxle Fluid Automatic 00000 6 18 Ea ee Transmitters Matching to Your Vehicle 2 12 Damage Warnings Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 2 9 Dimensions c 5 Transportation Courtesy 0 0 00 ee eee eee 8 7 Identification Num
4. 000005 2 64 Filling Your Tank isses 6 5 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ee ee oe 2 64 Filter Air EE 6 16 Exhaust sss sss 2 15 2 31 2 33 2 34 4 35 Filter Engine Oil i i oe shed ahead Godse Hone RE POP eR 6 14 Fuse Block Driver s Side 000 00 esas 6 59 Finish Care 0 1 seer e eee eee erences 6 53 Fuse Block Passenger s Side suu 6 62 Finish Damage iiis 6 55 ldentification v v Seco ems e 6 57 First Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 27 Oil Level Check o oo lee esses 7 33 Flashers Hazard Warning 000 ee eee ee 5 2 Overheating isses teten tE RE Ke te Rd 5 9 Flat Tire Changing eee 5 20 Running While Parked n nanana ununao 2 32 Fluids and Lubricants 0 00 00 00 0005 7 39 Specifications s scosese drees neri erhan 6 64 Foreign Countries Fuel isse 6 5 Starting Your iis exec a ER e RSEPO Y 2 21 French Language Manual sees n Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing 4 38 Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement 6 36 Engine OM REESE EM ctaaste a ents 6 11 cd E A 6 3 Adding iesenbeerr eerte ete ree dh ERES 6 12 Canada cesses nn nnne 6 3 POR c MELDEN 6 14 Filling a Portable Container lusus 6 7 Checking PDAS MEN TONES 6 12 Filling Your Tank 00 cee eee eee eee ee 6 5 Life Monitor 0 0 00 cece cece es 2 69 Gage hig icri iania indiani Py
5. 1 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 18 yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first an SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first Edo See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY s gt SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first fF See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Continued 7 19 yellow blue Short Trip City
6. 1 32 Use During Pregnancy sse eee 1 17 Why They Work ics cocer otare RAE ERR 1 6 Safety Chams oss erre Sere RERO RB 4 35 Safety Defects Reporting 0000 8 8 Safety Warnings and Symbols 4 iii Scheduled Maintenance Services 0 7 4 Seats Manual Front iecore rec OEE TY 1 2 POWED oxeerececc o erem me meme erg Pe ues 1 3 Reclining Front 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee 1 3 yellow blue Restraint Systems 0 0 00 ce eee eee eee 1 1 Seat Controls sie er cesses sea ess 1 2 Securing a Child Restraint 1 41 1 43 1 45 Second Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 26 Security Feedback sisis cerides 0 0 c cece eee eee 2 11 Security System 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 2 17 Noa cp PH 6 2 Bulletins Ordering 8 10 8 11 8 12 Manuals Ordering 8 10 8 11 8 12 Parts Identification Label 2 000 6 57 Publications Ordering 8 10 8 11 8 12 Work Doing Your Own 0 0 000 e eee 6 2 Service and Appearance Care 0000 6 1 Service and Owner Publications 8 10 8 11 8 12 Service Publications 8 10 8 11 8 12 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle 1 24 Sheet Metal Damage s esee esee 6 54 Shifting Automatic Transaxle 0 00 c eee eee ee 2 24 Into PARK P eee eee eee eee 2 28
7. 0 000000020 ae 7 33 Windshield Wiper 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 2 36 Blade Cleaning ERR e Sedo 6 51 Blade Replacement 0 00 00005 6 40 BUSES 5 trahe tuos cope re eod does ee edes 6 58 Winter Driving sees 4 25 Wiper Blade Check 00 0000 eee eee eee 7 34 Wiper Blades Cleaning seeess esses 6 51 Wiring Headlamp seeeseeeeeeses 6 58 Wrecker Towing 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 8 Wrench Wheel 0 000 5 22 yellow blue
8. Your vehicle has bulb warning lights When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting system its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out So when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure yellow blue they re all working Once you disconnect the trailer lamps the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 4 37 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular br
9. With power door locks you can lock or unlock all the doors of your vehicle using the driver s or front passenger s door lock switch The switch on each rear door works only that door s lock It won t lock or unlock all of the doors that s a safety feature Memory Door Locks Close the doors and turn on the ignition Every time you move the shift lever out of PARK P all of the doors will lock And every time you stop and move the shift lever into PARK P the doors will unlock If someone needs to get out while you re not in PARK P have that person use the manual or power lock When the door is yellow blue closed again it will not lock automatically Just use the manual or power lock to lock the door again If you need to lock the doors before shifting out of PARK P just use the manual or power lock button Personal Choice Programming If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry you can program the memory door locks feature to change to the following modes Mode Operation 0 No automatic door lock or unlock 1 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P No automatic door unlock 2 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P Only the driver s door automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK P 3 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P All doors automatically unlock when shifted into PARK P Vehicles are delivered progr
10. Don t let it get twisted Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 11 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 X SA The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash 1 12 yellow blue Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you To move it down squeeze the release handle and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the bottom of the release handle After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the release handle to make sure it has loc
11. In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and at least 15 amps better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged 2 23 How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area Automatic Transaxle Operation Park RNOOS32 1 Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on the steering column PARK P This position locks your front wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily 2 24 yellow blue It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move
12. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove the suds Wipe cleaned area with a clean damp towel or cloth Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 49 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifastain remains follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 If astain remains follow instructions for Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner 6 50 yellow blue Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product
13. or THIRD 3 as much as possible Don t shift into SECOND 2 unless you are going slower than 65 mph 105 km h or you can damage your engine FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the selector lever is put in FIRST 1 the transaxle won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your front wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transaxle Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transaxle Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill Parking Brake 4 brake pedal To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake 4 pedal with your left foot yellow blue If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will turn on and a single chime will be heard The parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot This will release the parking brake pedal When you lift your left foot the park brake pedal will follow it to the releas
14. the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic yellow blue Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for
15. trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle see Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too yellow blue Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes Does your trailer have its own brakes Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to
16. yellow blue Perimeter Lighting If Equipped When the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the headlamps parking lamps back up lamps and cornering lamps will turn on if it is dark enough outside according to the twilight sentinel If your vehicle is not equipped with twilight sentinel and perimeter lighting is active the lights will turn on whenever the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed Personal Choice Programming This feature can be programmed in the on or off mode for each transmitter To turn the feature off 1 Turn the ignition key to OFF 2 Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 3 Press the instant alarm on the remote keyless entry transmitter Perimeter lighting remains on at this time and the horn will chirp two times 2 43 4 Press the instant alarm on the remote keyless entry transmitter again Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will chirp one time 5 Release the door lock switch The perimeter lighting feature is now off To turn the feature on 1 Turn the ignition key to OFF 2 Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 3 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will chirp one time 4 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again Perimeter lighting is now enable
17. 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 7 28 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for prop
18. Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems b
19. If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle the driver s side and passenger s side fuse blocks yellow blue Driver s Side Fuse Block The driver s side fuse block is to the left of the steering wheel under the instrument panel Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses You ll find a fuse puller clipped to the inside of the cover Place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out Spare fuses are located in the slots labeled Spare on the following chart When finished replace the cover by snapping it back up into place 6 59 6 60 JU DOC LL dU UPC Ud add uuu dddutl uuuu UUB BI UU UU yellow blue Usage Not Used Not Used Power Seats Circuit Breaker Not Used Not Used PASS Key Spare Not Used Not Used Auto HVAC ALM Cruise Control Cluster Courtesy Lamps Power Mirrors Not Used Perimeter Lighting Not Used Turn Signal Back Up Lamps BTSI Spare Not Used Fuse 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B IC 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 9C ID Usage Not Used Anti Lock Brake System Computer Command Control Brake
20. P40113 14 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem BUICK the BUICK Emblem and the name LESABRE are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it Litho in U S A Part No 25685484 A First Edition ii We support voluntary technician certification CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE S For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd 1577 Meyerside Dr Mississauga Ontario LST 1B9 Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998 All Rights Reserved First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you
21. Press the button near the CD slot to remove a disc Press the button near the tape slot to remove a tape and the radio will play CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Your cassette tape player automatically reduces background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR You may turn Dolby NR off by pressing the number six preset Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in The disc should begin playing If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is off first press EJECT or RECALL First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 If you re driving on a very rough road or if it s very hot the disc may not play and an error code may appear on the display When things get back to normal the disc should play If the disc comes out it could be that E20 The disc is upside down E20 It is dirty scratched or wet e E20 There s too much moisture in the air Wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contac
22. The display will show either OFF or ON for a few seconds when you press the button Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will play CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset yellow blue AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Playing the Radio VOLUME Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease the volume 3 17 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue RECALL Press this button briefly to recall the station PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let being played or to display the clock To change what is you return to your favorite stations You can set up to normally shown on the display station or time press 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just this button until you see the display you
23. Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 30 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km AA Consol Seri Replace spark plugs a aa An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transaxle fluid change both the fluid and filter 7 31 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling
24. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN Press this button to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press P SCAN again to stop scanning The radio will not stop at a preset if the station is weak yellow blue Setting the Tone BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Adjusting the Speakers BAL
25. each remote keyless entry transmitter Vehicles are delivered with each transmitter defaulted with delayed locking off To turn the feature on 1 Press and hold LOCK on the driver s power door lock switch throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 2 Press the UNLOCK button on the transmitter The lock delay is still off and all doors will remain locked 3 Press the UNLOCK button on the transmitter again Lock delay is now active and all doors will unlock 4 Release the power door lock switch To turn this feature off repeat the previous procedure This procedure only changes the mode for the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter yellow blue If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry the delayed locking feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure 1 4 With the ignition on press and hold LOCK on the driver s power door lock switch All doors will lock Cycle the headlamp switch four times On the third cycle the doors will lock if the feature is now off or will unlock if the feature has been turned on To change modes cycle the headlamp switch once more A locking action will confirm the new mode Release the power door lock switch To turn the feature off repeat the previous procedure Rear Door Security Lock Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prev
26. even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transaxle see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index yellow blue NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal you
27. if equipped flash when locking no feedback when unlocking vehicle Headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps if equipped flash when locking and unlocking vehicle Headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps if equipped flash and horn chirps when locking no feedback when unlocking vehicle Headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps if equipped flash and horn chirps when locking headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps if equipped flash when unlocking vehicle Feedback will be provided according to the mode that has been selected 2 11 Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5 To change to another mode 1 Turn the ignition key to OFF 2 Press and hold LOCK on the driver s power door lock switch 3 Press the trunk button on the transmitter The transmitter will remain in its current mode 4 Press the trunk button again Each time the trunk button is pressed the transmitter will advance to the next mode 5 Release the power door lock switch This procedure only changes the mode for the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter 2 12 yellow blue Matching Transmitter s To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transm
28. if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else yellow blue Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture Wi
29. may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement yellow blue NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replac
30. operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action So before adding sound equipment check with non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn covering mobile radio and telephone units The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership GM Part No 12344789 3 34 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape If the cleaning cassette ejects insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
31. system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards yellow blue Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornerin
32. which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 15 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this 4 E 3 a Ah A The belt is twisted across the body 1 16 You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus w
33. 49 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired 1 50 Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Replacing Restra
34. 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or every 12 months whichever occurs first Tire Rotation Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Transaxle Service normal conditions Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior t
35. Buick owners 24 hours a day 365 days a year including weekends and holidays For details on Buick Premium Roadside Assistance please consult your Buick Premium Roadside Assistance owner booklet included with your owner s manual For needed assistance call the Buick Premium Roadside Assistance toll free hotline 1 800 252 1112 Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimi
36. Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in Never do this a crash A Here two children are wearing the same belt The Children who aren t buckled up can strike other queni belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a people who are crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in the center seat position the one that has only a lap belt 1 48 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries 1
37. EJECT Press this button to remove the disc The radio will play If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the player it will stay in the player When you turn on the ignition or system the disc will start playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and RECALL Press this button briefly to recall the station Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone being played or to display the clock To change what is Control If Equipped normally shown on the display station or time press the RECALL button until you see the display you want then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes If you press the button when the ignition is off the clock will show for a few seconds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press the up or down arrow to choose radio stations SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds and SCAN will appear on the display Use SCAN to Playing the Radio listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to VOLUME Press this knob to turn the system on and a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise
38. ERO ERR 3 34 Temperature Control Climate Control System 3 2 3 4 Temperature Control Passenger 00 3 9 Theater Dimming 5 0 5 oa ee be RR RR mn 2 43 Theft oes tet ien eise AE ee En 2 15 Theft Deterrent Alarm System 2 16 Theft Deterrent Feature 0000 3 30 THE ET LOCK iier entere RES RUE 3 30 Thermostat M Pm 6 22 Third Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 26 Tilt Steering Wheel 0 000000 2 34 Time Setting the 3 12 Tire Loading Information Label 4 30 9 10 TIVES MC 6 40 Alignment and Balance 00 005 6 46 Buying New 0 0 cece ee 6 44 SU MEMO 6 48 Changing a Flat 1 2 ete exe p e 5 20 Cleaning 2 4 Xaoaced i edad eee d 6 54 Compact Spare ouai ndo Perte ce 5 32 Inflation x e bre EUpUerO E oC 6 41 Inflation Check sssseeeseeees esses 7 33 Inspection and Rotation 00000 6 42 Loading i ER ERR Rei IRE ER RC 4 30 lucia TREE 6 41 Temperature 5a cce e e od Oed res E Oe nh 6 46 TEQCUOD sreo irei enea porc e inse di tu te pc 6 45 Tr adWeab esr carece re A ACER Ue SIRO Ce 6 45 Uniform Quality Grading 0 6 45 Wear Indicators 0 2 cece eee eee 6 43 Wheel Replacement 0 00 000 0000 6 46 When It s Time for New 000 e eee eee 6 43 jo ch 1 40 Torque Lock i536 m Re eee oN eh Oe 2 30 Torque Wheel Nut
39. F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to drive longer 6 19 yellow blue Checking the Fluid Level Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes 1 The transaxle fluid dipstick top is a round loop and is next to the brake master cylinder behind the engine block Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 6 20 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index yellow blue If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area o
40. Out of PARK P 2 tel eee e 2 31 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 0 1 12 Signaling Turns eee eee eee 2 35 Skidding obrero e Rh eee He Relates 4 14 Sound Equipment Adding 00 3 34 Spare Tire Compact 0 00 00 cee eee eee 5 32 Specifications and Capacities 00 6 64 Specifications Engine 0 0 00 e eee 6 64 Speech Impaired Customer Assistance 8 4 Speedometet 4 5 eere ppc eee e Ie e Red when 2 58 SRS enit Bad Reba es PRMGS gas Pet deep es 1 18 Stains Cleaning 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 49 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Starter Switch Check 0 0 0 cece eitas 7 35 Starting Your Engine 0 000 000 0ee 2 21 NI MM 5 10 NOD DD m 4 10 In Emergencies 0 00 cece eee eh 4 11 Magnasteer pritej cece eee eee hehe hn 4 10 lij oe Dt 4 10 TiDS Lock erkesxg ReuvPYeeHPERRER KECO IP ESTO 4 10 Wheel TIE sa sad ect aer eio rice hc odes 2 34 Wheel Touch Controls Lesen 3 11 3 32 Storage Compartments 00 00 0008 2 51 Storage Vehicle ertet eeu 6 31 Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 33 SUM VISORS AMETE 2 53 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 1 18 Symbols Vehicle 0 0 cece eee eee cee eee v Tachometer EE 2 58 Taillamp Bulb Replacement 0 6 37 Tape Player Care sere ccs gt beth wep
41. Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water such as water up to the carpeting or higher or if water enters your vehicle and soaks the carpet the air bag controller can be soaked and ruined If this ever happens and then you start your vehicle the damage could make the air bags inflate even if there s no crash You would have to replace the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts If your vehicle is ever in a flood or if it s exposed to water that soaks the carpet you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery cables Don t let anyone start the vehicle under any circumstances See your dealer for service 1 24 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the LeSabre Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a ser
42. Passengers cese ces ecw ees Sab RIT 1 26 Turn Signal Bulb Replacement 6 39 Window Defogger eeseeeeeeeee 3 8 Rearview Mirror 0 0 0 0 c ce eee eee eee 2 46 Electrochromic Day Night 0 2 46 Inside Day Night 0 00 0000 e eee 2 46 Inside Day Night with Reading Lamps 2 46 With Compass ser yari n cee eee eee 2 47 Reclining Front Seatbacks 00000000 1 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 39 Recovery Tank Coolant 0 000 000 0085 5 14 Recreational Vehicle Towing 00 4 29 Refrigerants Air Conditioning 6 64 Remote Trunk Releases onere nore DERES 2 14 Trunk Release Lockout 0000 0000 2 15 Remote Keyless Entry 0 00 00 esses 2 9 Instant Alarm 4 5 janet em Edere ec ER 2 10 Personal Choice eropa cee eee eee ene 2 10 Resynchronization 0 0 0 0 eee eae 2 13 Security Feedback 0 00 00 00 0008 2 11 Replacement B lb 2234 pri dere expl eb di Gs 6 63 hr ccc 6 65 hcl T 6 46 Replacing Safety Belts 00000 1 50 Reporting Safety Defects 0000000 8 9 Restraints Checking hic iid bebo ee RUE P CREE 1 50 Child vei erreten ReRERRET EE L N ER ERE PRIN 1 35 AAG zie pes pote pcd de Roi eed petos 1a 1 4 Replacing Parts After a Crash 1 50 System Check icis ios ke ee
43. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best If you have the electronic touch system for quick cool down on very hot days use MAX with the temperature and fan speed adjusted to COOL and HIGH If this setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry For normal cooling on hot days use NORM and adjust the temperature and fan speed for your comfort If RECIRC is selected while in the NORM air conditioning mode the system works like MAX and recirculates the air First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 On sunny days when the air is moderately warm or cool use BI LEV to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets On days like these the sun may adequately warm your upper body but your lower body may not be warm enough To warm or cool the air delivered adjust the TEMPERATURE lever The amount of fresh air entering the vehicle is limited when RECIRC is selected This is helpful when you are trying to cool the air in your vehicle or limit the air entering the vehicle If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system and it is set for AUTO on very hot days the system will automatically enter the RECIRC mode and the temperature door will be positioned at the full cold position for maximum cooling If the system is not in the AUTO mode RECIRC should be selected to provide maximum cooling You can ch
44. To reset it push the button 2 58 yellow blue Tachometer If Equipped The tachometer tells you how fast the engine is going It displays engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm 1 e RPM X 1000 NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area or engine damage may occur Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle yellow blue When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do ab
45. Turn station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop it counterclockwise to decrease volume scanning The sound will mute while scanning 3 25 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN Press this button to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press P SCAN again to stop scanning If a preset station has weak reception the radio will not stop at the preset station 3 26 yellow blue AUTO SET Press this button and the system will seek and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM stations on your preset buttons AUTO SET will flash while seeking and will remain on until this function is complete To return to the stations you manually set press AUTO SET again Setting the Tone BA
46. Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers 3 15 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Playing a Cassette Tape The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition and the radio are on the tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOLUME FADE BAL BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is off first press EJECT or RECALL Note that the cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc players will work in your cassette tape player Your tape bias is set automatically If E and a number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error E10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape ov
47. Vanity i a ecciesie godin did tread ter d 2 53 MMT eder ECRE Mee pU Seele xD Rue Vete e 6 4 Multifunction Lever 0 cece ee eee eee 2 34 Net Convenience ereraa i LE ee eee 2 52 Neutral Automatic Transaxle 0005 2 25 New Vehicle Break In 00 00 e eee eae 2 19 Night Vision g esine pesegn eh ofthe S EA 4 16 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 65 Odometer HEE ETE eM ate ho seed Qupd Ra IE 2 58 Odometer Trip usi cmm RE nals nde b 2 58 Off Road Recovery 0 ce eee eee eee ee 4 12 yellow blue Oil Engine i oos enr ete pESRPF ots he ER 6 11 Oil Level Warning Light 0 000 2 67 Oil Pressure Light leesleeeeeees 2 67 OnStar EIDEM D 2 53 Overdrive Automatic Transaxle 2 26 Overheating Engine 0 00 eee eee eee 5 9 Owner Checks and Services usus 7 33 Owner Publications Ordering 8 10 8 11 8 12 Paint Spotting Chemical 0000 6 55 Park Automatic Transaxle 0 0 0 0 02008 2 24 Shifting Mito i ere RE RE EE Ie Eee 2 28 Shifting Out of 00 ee ee eese 2 30 Parking AtNight 4 36 siis p ERR EP ER eaei REDI 2 15 Brake ciccdiss geen ees eth sone e e 2 27 Brake Mechanism Check suus 7 36 LOS i a e x RR Rex a ER REPRE Hes T ES 2 16 Over Things That Burn ssesssesssss 2 31 Passenger Temperature Control 4 3 9 PASSI
48. Vehicle Break In 2 43 Interior Lamps 2 20 Ignition Positions 2 46 Mirrors 2 21 Starting Your Engine 2 51 Storage Compartments 2 23 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 53 Sun Visors 2 24 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2 53 OnStar System 2 27 Parking Brake 2 54 The Instrument Panel Your 2 28 Shifting Into PARK P Information System 2 30 Shifting Out of PARK P 2 59 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 31 Parking Over Things That Burn yellow blue Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children The ignition key is for the ignition only The door keys are for the doors and all other locks yellow blue When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer removes the plugs from the keys and gives them to the first owner However the ignition key may not have a plug If the ignition key doesn t have a plug it will have a bar coded key tag Each plug or tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep the plugs or the tags in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using these plugs or the tag If your ignition keys don t have plugs or the tag go to your dealer for the correct key code if you
49. When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle For example These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps your controls warning and you may see original battery your passengers indicator lights whenever your eve MASTER El WINDSHIELD CAUTION Le LIGHTING tot WIPER Nw POSSIBLE i SWITCH ENGINE X INJURY COOLANT LE FUSE Lom nl TURN WINDSHIELD SIGNALS WASHER CAUSTIC TEMP BATTERY FASTEN ACID COULD ke SEAT CAUSE BELTS ewon DOOR LOCK PROTECT UNLOCK EYES BY SHIELDING CHARGING SYSTEM w ore PARKING Z al P WINDSHIELD BATTERY LiGHteR LAA DEFROSTER BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES WINDOW POWER DAYTIME DEFOGGER wiNDow RUNNING D LAMPS ENGINE OIL y 77 PRESSURE d FUEL ANTI LOCK s BRAKES SPARKOR ali DONIS Ew VENTILATING EXPLODE AIR BAG TN FOG LAMPS x FAN BATTERY t t b LI HAZARD WARNING FLASHER REAR Gy COOLANT wa SPEAKER n First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 199
50. Your vehicle may be equipped with the OnStar Communications service The following services are available 24 hours a day from an OnStar representative Roadside Service with Location Emergency Services Button Remote Door Unlock Theft Detection Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment Concierge Customer Conveniences Services NOTE Installation of aftermarket equipment is possible however the features described above will not be compatible with any portable phone other than the OnStar cellular phone available from your dealer For more information contact your dealer yellow blue 2 53 yellow blue The Instrument Panel Your Information System 9e cho gv o t Be d qood Air Outlet Instrument Panel Intensity Control Twilight Sentinel Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Tilt Steering Wheel Lever Instrument Cluster Gages Hazard Warning Flasher Switch Audio System yellow blue Glove Box 10 11 12 13 14 15 Climate Control System Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter Ignition Switch Traction Control Button Trunk Release Button Hood Release 2 55 yellow blue Instrument Panel Clusters Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going how much fuel you re using and many other things you ll need to drive safely and econ
51. accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruise control If you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill slope you may not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal or Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased 2 39 Exterior Lamps Headlamps These switches control these systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Lamps Sidemarker Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights Press the LIGHTS switch to turn on the headlamps Press it again to turn them off When the headlamps are turned on the instrument panel lights will also turn on The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted with the PANEL LIGHTS switch to the left of the steering column Some lights will not dim during daylight hours Press the PARK switch to turn on the parking lamps Press it again to turn them off If the parking lamps were turned on with the PARK switch they must be turned off with that switch 2 40 yellow blue Lamps On Reminder If you leave the manual headlamp o
52. accessed from under the front of the vehicle Reach up from under the vehicle and while pushing in the tab on the bulb assembly turn the assembly counterclockwise and remove Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out of the retainer Replace the bulb and turn the bulb assembly back into place Cornering Lamps Follow the same procedure as used for replacing the headlamps However to remove the cornering lamp bulb turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out yellow blue Trunk Mounted Back Up and Taillamps 2 Pull out the assembly 1 Loosen and remove the eight fasteners four per side that hold the assembly in place The assembly for both sides is one piece The entire piece must be removed to replace any bulbs 6 37 yellow 3 Push in the tab and turn the bulb assembly 4 Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out counterclockwise to remove it yellow blue Rear Turn Signals 1 Open the trunk Turn the screw located just inside of the trunk counterclockwise and remove 2 Pull the carpet away from the rear area to access the turn signal bulb assembly 3 Turn the bulb socket one quarter turn counterclockwise while pressing it firmly 4 Pull the bulb socket straight out of the assembly 5 Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out 6 Replace with a new bulb by pushing the bulb straight into the socket until the bulb clicks into place 7 Turn the bulb s
53. also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options 4 30 yellow blue a N MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL Agh Me TOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER dif T R ION DARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATIMQF M SIN ABOVE 199 ASS CAR M J The other label is the Certification label found on the rear edge of the driver s door It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Don t carry more than 176 lbs 80 kg in your trunk yellow blue Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put
54. and Hazard Lamps Not Used Interior Lighting Cigarette Lighter Air Bag System Spare Not Used Not Used Cooling Fans Transaxle Parking Lamps Interior Lamps Not Used Parking Lamps Radio Cluster Telltale Chime Cluster RAC LCM Fuse 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 9D 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E 9E yellow blue Usage Spare Heated Mirrors Not Used Manual A C Not Used TCC Radio Not Used Not Used Air Bag System PASS Key Not Used Not Used Rear Defog Not Used Miscellaneous Engine Non OBD II Wipers Washer Not Used 6 61 Passenger s Side Fuse Block Additional fuses are located in the relay center on the passenger s side below the instrument panel You must remove the sound insulator on the right side of the passenger footwell to replace these fuses Since the replacement of these fuses can be difficult we recommend that you see your dealer for fuse replacement 6 62 i d RELAY POSITIONS FUSE POSITIONS m L yellow blue yellow blue Fuse Usage Replacement Bulbs 1 Door Locks Front Outside Lamps Bulb 2 Trunk Release RAC Cornering Lamps 0 3156 Halogen Headlamps 3 Horns LOW Beam lever pae ht n aen 9006 4 Not Used High Beam ui ure estes 9005 5 Miscellaneous Engine Controls OBD II Parking Torn Signa
55. blue Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining yellow blue Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Some Other
56. do not send cash For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation C U S Order Processing 5 00 C MasterCard Canadian Postage See Note Below CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION Discover n Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number qn Check here if your billing address e e Expiration EE EE is different from your shipping CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM BUI ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds To cover Canadian postage add 11 50 plus the U S order processing First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Section9 Index Air Bags cis hed ke Re RERO n pO abemus oe 1 18 Armrest Storage cus lk Rp E RE EE ERES 2 51 How Does it Restrain llle esee 1 22 Ashtrays ss so e eh hee hr p 2 52 How it WOEKS eee ete met E penes 1 20 Audio Equipment Adding 00 3 34 Location sehe ates amore RI UM DNE RU AU CR rs 1 20 Audio Steering Wheel Touch Controls 3 32 Readiness Light 00000 1 20 2 60 Audio Systems eee 3 12 SEVICE M iaia ae e An aa a ENR a 1 24 Automatic Dim
57. do this it will help you learn about the features These mean there is something that could hurt and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll you or other people find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly i In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then Index we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or A good place to look for what you need is the Index in others coild be hurt back of the manual It s an alphabetical list of what s in the manual and the page number where you ll find it rer You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning iii First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle iv In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage
58. down arrow to increase or decrease volume SRCE If you have radio only controls you will have this control Press SRCE to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing If both a tape and disc are installed the system will first go to tape play Press SRCE again to go to disc play yellow blue MUTE If you have radio only controls you will have this control Press MUTE to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 33 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue To help avoid hearing loss or damage Care of Your Ca
59. each pushbutton 3 18 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 AUTO SET Press this button and the system will seek and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM stations on your preset buttons depending on which band AM or FM you are listening to AUTO SET will flash while seeking and will remain on until this function is complete To return to the stations you manually set press AUTO SET again Setting the Tone BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them TONE This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical pop rock jazz talk and country western stations CLASS will appear on the display when you first press TONE Each time you press it another setting will appear on the display Press it again after C amp W appears and MANUAL will appear Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs Also if you use the BASS and TREB knobs control will return to them and MANUAL will appear yellow blue Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the soun
60. footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km a ae Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 7 27 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km a aa Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles
61. hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 4 12 yellow blue Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents
62. how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being
63. ignition and transaxle And remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you 2 15 Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key If possible park in a busy well lit area Put your valuables in a storage area like your trunk or glove box Be sure to close and lock the storage area Close all windows Turn off the TRUNK RELEASE lockout in the glove box Lock the glove box Lock all the doors except the driver s Then take the door key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you 2 16 yellow blue Universal Theft Deterrent If Equipped If your vehicle has this option it has a theft deterrent alarm SECURITY system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle Activating the system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should turn on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not arme
64. in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index 4 9 To turn the system off press the TRACTION CONTROL button on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The traction control system warning light will come on and stay on If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button the warning light will come on but the system won t turn off right away It will wait until there s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The traction control system warning light should go off Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking 4 10 yellow blue Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Magnasteer If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with GM Magnasteer a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds It provides ease when parking yet a firm solid feel at highway speeds Your steering can be adj
65. it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 60 yellow blue Battery System Warning Light Standard Cluster Gage Cluster When you turn the key to RUN one of these lights will turn on briefly to show that your generator and battery charging systems are working If the light stays on you need service and you should take your vehicle to the dealer at once To save your battery until you get there turn off all accessories and set your climate control system to OFF Voltage Gage If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the gage cluster this gage shows voltage in the electrical system The normal range is 11 to 15 volts If the gage reading stays in either red range or the battery warning light turns on have your dealer check the electrical system Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well yellow blue If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away BRAKE A BRAKE Gage Cluster Standard Cluster One of these lights should come on when you turn the key to START If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light and chime come on while you are driving pull off the r
66. lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 28 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown too loose In a crash you would move forward child restraints and for small adults When installed on a too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt the comfort guide pulls the belt away shoulder belt should fit against your body from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a co
67. more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too 6 48 Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has two cleaners Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index yellow blue Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric l 2 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds
68. need a new ignition key NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys 2 3 yellow blue Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside use your door key or remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped With your door key turning the key toward the rear of the vehicle will lock the door Turning the key toward the front of the vehicle will unlock it Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system and it is activated unlock the doors only with the key or remote keyless entry system This will avoid setting off the alarm open the doors and fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle To lock the door from the inside slide the manual door lock control on the door down To unlock the door slide the manual door lock control up This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle Power Door Locks
69. needs service yellow blue Key Reminder Warning If you leave your key in the ignition in OFF you will hear a warning chime when you open the driver s door Always leave your key in LOCK If you leave it in any other position you will drain your battery power Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transaxle Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 2 21 Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it doesn t start right away hold your key in START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 22 yellow blue If your engine still won t start or start
70. not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to work The sound will mute while seeking 3 20 yellow blue NEXT 2 Press this button to search for the next selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to work The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK up and down arrows will also find the previous and next selections on the tape 4 3 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape reverses PP 4 Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape advances SIDE 5 Press this button to change the side of the tape that is playing IC 6 Press this button to reduce background noise The double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured und
71. of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test 2 65 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible 2 66 yellow blue If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find
72. on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The transaxle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the remote trunk release button does not open the trunk make sure the remote trunk release lockout switch in the glove box is in the on position Remote Trunk Release Lockout The trunk release lockout switch in the glove box must be on for the TRUNK button to work This feature allows you to secure items in the trunk when you must leave the ignition key with an attendant To secure the trunk turn off the TRUNK RELEASE switch lock the glove box then take the door key with you Now the trunk button to the left of the steering column will not open the trunk Trunk Security Override The remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped will open the trunk even if the trunk release lockout switch is OFF yellow blue Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it With the ignition off and the driver s door open you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your
73. other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 44 yellow blue Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare though It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
74. radio is on When a disc is inserted the disc will play until you press AM FM Then the disc will stop playing and the radio will play Press SOURCE again to play a disc again CD PLAY will show on the display EJECT Press this button to remove the disc The radio will play 3 29 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the player it will stay in the player When you turn on the ignition or system the disc will start playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source Also as a protection feature if a CD is ejected and left in the player it will be pulled back in the player with the ignition on or off Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed If THEFTLOCK is active the THEFTLOCK indicator will flash when the ignition is off The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate 3 30 Activating the Theft Det
75. skid When you start your engine or when you begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index yellow The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead
76. that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they aren t your vehicle needs service NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty 5 13 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank NOTICE If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of In cold weather Water can freeze and crack the clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine engine radiator heater core and other parts Use coolant at the coolant
77. the button the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds This is the automatic calibration mode Drive in a circle to calibrate the mirror See Compass Calibration explained previously yellow blue Manual Remote Control Mirror To adjust the driver s side outside mirror rotate the knob located on the driver s door The right outside mirror must be adjusted manually The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position To adjust your passenger s side mirror sit in the driver s seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you 2 49 Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped If your vehicle has the outside power remote mirrors the control is located on the driver s door Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose the right or left mirror Push the arrow controls in the direction you want to move the mirror Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat 2 50 yellow blue A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror o
78. the display you want then hold the button until the display flashes If you press the button when the ignition is off the clock will show for a few seconds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press the up or down arrow to choose radio stations SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds and SCAN will appear on the display Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 3 22 yellow blue Turn the radio on Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station Press TONE to select the setting you prefer rop 9 a Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN Press this button to listen to each of your preset stations fo
79. the use of the air conditioning compressor or the use of the RECIRC mode To turn off the VENT selection push the VENT button again RECIRC When RECIRC is selected the system will limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interior of the vehicle quickly or limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle RECIRC and AUTO may be selected at the same time The system will remain in RECIRC until the ignition is turned off then the system will return back to the previously selected mode Deselecting the RECIRC button will also turn off the RECIRC function RECIRC can be selected in all manual airflow modes except FRONT defrost and VENT FRONT This selection is used to defrost the windshield by directing the airflow toward the windshield yellow blue If FRONT is selected while in the AUTO mode the fan speed and the air temperature from the front defroster will vary If a manual fan speed setting is selected the fan speed will remain at that selection until another fan speed selection is made or the AUTO mode is selected To turn off FRONT press the AUTO or AIR FLOW button FRONT defrost will work better if any ice or snow is cleared from the hood and the air inlet area between the base of the windshield and the hood Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down
80. there s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on If your brakes begin to overheat the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down If the traction control system is affected by an engine related problem the system will turn off and the warning light will come on If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service 2 63 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E asa aa TEMP This light will tell you that your engine coolant has overheated or your radiator cooling fans are not working If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 64 yellow blue Engine Coolant Temperature Gage If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the gage cluster you have a gage that shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot That reading means the same thing as the warning light It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road st
81. this lever between LO and HI The instrument panel lights will be on only when the headlamps are on The interior courtesy lamps can be turned on by sliding the lever all the way to the right to INT Courtesy Lamps When any door is opened several lamps go on They make it easy for you to enter and leave the vehicle You can also turn these lamps on by sliding the PANEL LIGHTS switch to INT Interior Illuminated Entry If Equipped Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped and the interior courtesy lamps will turn on and stay on for up to one minute The lamps will turn off immediately by pressing the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter starting the engine or activating the power door locks Delayed Entry Lighting When you open the door the interior lamps will turn on When you close the door with the ignition off the interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to an on position Note that locking the doors will override the delayed entry lighting feature and the lamps will turn off right away Theater Dimming This feature allows for a three to five second fade out of the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off Delayed Exit Lighting With this feature the interior lamps will turn on and stay on for up to 25 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition This will give you time to find the door pull handle or lock switches
82. use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part No 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water 6 51 Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 52 yellow blue Cleaning t
83. wali Hae 2 51 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users 8 4 Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 2 Damage Finish i veresnter err aaa aaah RE BE 6 55 Damage Sheet Metal esee 6 54 Daytime Running Lamps seesesseessse 2 41 Dead Battery ect song cde ewig chen Pha gaa E RES 353 yellow blue Defects Reporting Safety 000004 8 9 Defensive Driving sssleeeeeee eee 4 2 Defogger Rear Window esee eee eee 3 8 Defos sins 22534 Ie RR ek ae eee ue erede e Soest 3 8 Detrosting oe eR ehe e snd ebat 3 8 Delayed Entry Lighting 0 00 2 43 Delayed Exit Lighting 0 000 2 43 Delayed Locking 0 0c eee eee eee eee 2 6 Personal Choice Programming 2 7 Dimensions Vehicle 0 00 e cee ee eaee 6 65 Dolby B Noise Reduction 3 17 3 20 3 2 Door LOCKS eye ERA ds Jak caeaaaee tee 2 4 Driver Position 1 10 Driving City see EE REL ae Ro exceed 4 20 Ibo PR 4 2 Dr nken oii e RI RR RES 4 3 Freeway 3 tase RR oc ad Otte dy RIP MEASURE 4 21 Ina Blizzard 5 05 cca sections se go ee areas E E S es 4 27 In Foreign Countries 0 0 00 0 0 00008 6 5 Tn the Rain s esirioss tating tr n tay anaes e 4 17 Night oreari nne eee ke cates E PORRO 4 15 Om Curves iaai orgs eb tbe dore die 4 10 On Grades While Towi
84. want then hold 1 the button until the display flashes If you press the RM button when the ignition is off the clock will show for a 2 Press AM FM to select the band few seconds 3 Tune in the desired station Finding a Station 4 Press TONE to select the setting you prefer AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons The and FM2 The display shows your selection sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button TUNE Press the up or down arrow to choose radio stations SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking P SCAN Press this button to listen to each of your SCAN Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to and SCAN will appear on the display Use SCAN to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to onto mg next preset sialon PIRE SCAN again to stop a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next oe If a preset station has weak reception the station Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop tadio wilknot stopat the preset station scanning The sound will mute while scanning 6 Repeat the steps for
85. where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing 6 26 Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY Add washer fluid until the tank is full yellow blue yellow blue NOTICE Ixus Brake Fluid When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver s your washer system and paint side of the engine compartment It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid 6 27 There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work a
86. who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger s safety belt 1 19 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue There is an air bag readiness How the Air Bag System Works ROT light on the instrument panel which shows B AG AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 20 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue AV 130038 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between
87. your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers 4 27 Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 28 yellow blue Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the wind
88. your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Tire Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Most trips are through dusty areas You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle Ifthe vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner yellow blue Short Trip City Intervals Ev
89. 0 Make sure each wheel stud is centered in each wheel dirt off hole while tightening the nuts Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 5 28 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 11 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise on the jack Lower the jack completely 12 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Ib ft 140 N m 5 29 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Storing the Flat Tire and Tools NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place NOTICE l After you ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle you ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk Use t
90. 000 00002 K Type lae obtenido a V6 Displacement 1 2 Ree ERR 3 8L Horsepower 0 0 eee eee eee 205 hp Firing Order 0 4 1 6 5 4 3 2 Thermostat Temperature 195 F 91 C Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant be sure the proper refrigerant is used If you re not sure ask your dealer Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Air Cleaner Filter AC Type A 1096C Engine Oil Filter AC Type PF 47 Fuel Filter eel AC Type GF 627 Transaxle Filter GM Part No 8651909 Spark Plugs 0 AC Type 41 921 Gap 0 060 inch 1 52 mm Windshield Wiper Blades Type se v eben be ee Wate eae Pee es Pin Length eese 22 inches 56 cm yellow blue Vehicle Dimensions Length 5 2 e 200 inches 508 0 cm Width 0 08 73 6 inches 186 9 cm Height o 55 7 inches 141 5 cm Wheelbase 110 8 inches 281 4 cm Tread Width PRONE 1 bie see phen 60 4 inches 153 4 cm Reate ARRA 60 2 inches 152 9 cm 6 65 L36 Engine Accessory Belt 6 66 yellow blue The L36 engine uses an engine accessory belt This diagram shows the features connected and the routing See Maintenance Schedule in the Index for when to check the belt Power Steering Generator Air Conditioning Crank Coolant Pump t
91. 1 2 Pull up on the control bar under the front of the seat to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it then release the bar and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 The power seat controls are on the armrest Front TILT Control Raise the front of the seat by pressing the outer side of the TILT switch Press the inner side of the TILT switch to lower the front of the seat Center Control Move the seat forward or backward by pushing FWD forward or BACK Raise the seat by pushing the UP control Lower the seat by pushing the DN down control yellow Rear TILT Control Raise the rear of the seat by pressing the outer side of the TILT switch Lower the rear of the seat by pressing the inner side of the TILT switch To adjust the seatback lift the lever on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback to where you want it Release the lever to lock the seatback Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go i
92. 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first Eo See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Serv
93. 83 000 km Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain 7 14 yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 57 000 Miles 95 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 15 Short Trip Cit
94. 9 yellow blue NOTES vi First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 5 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 9 Here Are Questions Many People Ask AboutSafety Belts and the Answers 1 10 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 10 Driver Position 1 17 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 18 Right Front Passenger Position 1 18 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 1 25 Center Passenger Position 1 26 1 29 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving
95. Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water yellow blue Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t
96. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continued 6 41 NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Don t forget your compact spare tire It should be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good qual
97. Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 34 yellow blue If you re using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you have a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Tire Loading Information label located at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the
98. E PERFORMED yellow blue Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Buick if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 8 Warranty Information 8 4 Customer Assistance for Text 8 9 Reporting Safety Defects to the United Telephone TTY Users States Government 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices 8 9 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons Canadian Government with Disabilities 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 6 Roadside Assistance 8 10 Ordering Service and Owner Publications 8 6 Canadian Roadside Assistance in Canada 8 7 Courtesy Transportation Customer Satisfaction Procedure yellow blue Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Buick Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealersh
99. FLOOR MID MID and WINDSHIELD FLOOR If the system is set for AUTO pressing the AIR FLOW button will display the current airflow direction and the comfort setting Press the AIR FLOW up or down button again to change the direction of the airflow If the AIR FLOW up button is selected while in the FRONT defrost mode the system will direct the air toward the windshield and the floor If the AIR FLOW down button is selected while in the FRONT defrost mode the system will direct the air toward the floor and the FRONT defrost mode will cancel Notice the arrows in the display OFF If the passenger comfort control is turned on it can be turned off by pressing the OFF button once Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the main system Turning off the main system causes the fan to turn off and the airflow to be directed toward the floor The system will still try to keep the interior of the vehicle at the previous chosen comfort setting The outside temperature will show on the display when the system is OFF 3 5 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 The ventilation system always allows fresh air to flow through your vehicle when the vehicle is moving even with the system in the OFF mode VENT The VENT button allows outside air to flow through your vehicle without the air conditioning compressor working Selecting VENT and the AUTO button at the same time allows the system to control automatically without
100. First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty 5 10 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning you can If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so l 2 drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If th rni ti Il t d park Climb a long hill on a hot day p e NUI NE Stop after high speed driving If there s sti
101. First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue The 1999 Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1 1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly It also explains the SRS system 2 1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle 3 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system 4 1 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions 5 1 Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or overheated engine etc 6 1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good 7 1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use 8 1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Buick for assistance and how to get service and owner publications It also gives you information on Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 9 9 1 Index Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual You can use it to quickly find something you want to read LLLI First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue
102. NG i xsse9io comu py dme E EROR NP nO EE 4 13 PASS Key Io 0 ccc ce ccc e ete eee eee 2 18 Perimeter Lighting 00 00 cece eee eee 2 44 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 37 Personal Choice Programming 2 44 Delayed Locking 0 0 00 cece eee eee 2 6 Memory Door Locks 0 0 00 00 00000 2 5 Perimeter Lighting 0 0 000 2 43 Security Feedback 0 0 0 0 000 0000 2 11 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Power DoorLocks e mer eye 2 5 Option FUSES i e eet hh hmm hh eme 6 58 Remote Control Mirror 0 0 000000 2 50 eat sarsa c aer wig ce ee e ERE En NR Rese 1 3 NICHT 4 10 Steering Fluid 20 niesie eee eee eee 6 25 Widows sisi ded baeSydtneae eik atni EET 2 33 Pregnancy Use of Safety Belts 1 17 Problems on the Road sesslsees esee 5 1 Publications Service and Owner 8 10 8 11 8 12 Raiaor Side gp evertere PUeeesewe E ues 5 16 Radiator Pressure Cap 0 00 eee eee eee ee 6 22 Radio Reception 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 3 33 Radios RR 3 12 3 14 3 17 3 21 3 25 Rain Driving In 0 0 eee cee 4 17 Reading Lamps 0 00 ce eee eee eens 2 45 Rear Door Security Locks 0 000000 eee 2 8 Outside Seat Position 0 0 00 2008 1 26 Safety Belt Comfort Guides 0 1 29 Seat
103. NO DAS E when Bare 3 34 Ig PE 3 16 3 20 3 27 Center Passenger Position 00005 1 25 Certification Label sses csse erpen sas osip meeter 4 30 Chains Safety seans eee ERE EO EA 4 35 Chains Tire acne ve acc E AAE NEEN 6 48 9 2 Change Oil Soon Light 0000 2 69 Changing a Flat Tire 00 0 eee ee eee 5 20 Check Engine Light 0 00 2 00005 2 65 Check Oil Level Light 0 0000 2 68 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 50 Chemical Paint Spotting 0000 6 55 Child Restraints carre hee trece 1 35 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 41 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position 1 43 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position 1 45 Top Strap eee eR ke ee eI ee ER E 1 40 Where to Put e Rem RR ER cae cares 1 39 Cigarette Lighter 2 scsehe mne RR RP 2 52 Circuit Breakers and Fuses 0 000 5 6 59 Cleaner ATP sucede EI hao A Ree VA AERE UA ICE 6 16 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels 0 000000 e ee eae 6 54 Exterior Lamps Lenses 000000 6 53 Fabie 25 6 cer eoa opere I lee terr eques 6 49 Glass Surfaces ssec doar lenis acte tee ee 6 51 Inside of Your Vehicle 00 2008 6 49 Instrument Panel 0 00 00 eee eee 6 51 Interior Plastic Components 0 6 51 Leather sii case nas RUSO PESCE Cees 6 51 Outside of Your Vehicle
104. Open the box and then remove the wing bolt by turning it counterclockwise Remove the jack and wheel wrench The tools you ll be using include the jack A and wheel wrench B 5 22 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue If your vehicle has a wheel cover remove it by using the flat end of the wheel wrench Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel Nut Caps Pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off Be careful the rim edges may be sharp Don t try to remove it with your bare hands Note When replacing any wheel cover carefully line up the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover If your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center cover that hides the wheel nuts remove the center cover by using the flat end of the wheel wrench to pry it off 5 23 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 If your vehicle has this aluminum wheel you may remove the wheel nut caps and to loosen the wheel nuts When reinstalling the decorative nut caps tighten the caps snugly with the wheel wrench then continue one quarter rotation to secure plastic caps If your vehicle has wire wheel covers remove them as follows 5 24 have plastic wheel nut caps Use the wheel nut wrench to yellow blue 1 Use the wire wheel key wrench to remove the wheel cover Using the flat end of the key wrench handle between the wire wheel cover and t
105. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again p l keeping the tip down and check the level Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged NOTICE ae The engine oil fill cap is behind the engine oil dipstick eS E Pot D and engine fans Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index 6 12 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the Starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscos
106. Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index 1 4 yellow blue City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 20 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to t
107. SS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them TONE This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical pop rock jazz talk and country western stations CLASS will appear on the display when you first press TONE Each time you press it another setting will appear on the display Press it again after C amp W appears and MANUAL will appear Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs Also if you use the BASS and TREB knobs control will return to them and MANUAL will appear First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition and the radio are on the
108. SSORY A This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off To use push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key LOCK B This is the only position in which you can remove the key This position locks your ignition steering wheel and transaxle It s a theft deterrent feature OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel It doesn t lock the steering wheel like LOCK and it doesn t send any electrical power to the accessories Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is not running RUN D The switch returns to this position after you start your engine and release the key This is the position for normal driving Even when the engine is not running you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories and to display some instrument panel warning lights START E This position starts your engine When the engine starts release the key and the switch will move to RUN NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle
109. Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Continued Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 93 000 Miles 155 000 km SS Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emission Control Service See footnote a 96 000 Miles 160 000 km nisse OI Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first Edo See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 7 20 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly re
110. System Control If Equipped 3 11 Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control 3 30 Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped 3 32 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped 3 12 Audio Systems 3 33 Understanding Radio Reception 3 12 Setting the Clock 3 34 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 12 AM FM Stereo 3 35 Care of Your Compact Discs 3 14 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 35 Care of Your Compact Disc Player If Equipped 3 36 Heated Backlite Antenna First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Comfort Controls This section describes how to operate your climate control system Your climate control system uses ozone friendly R 134a refrigerant With these systems you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Electronic Touch Climate Control If your vehicle has this climate control system the following information tells you how it works 3 2 yellow blue Fan Button The FAN control is used to select the speed of the blower fan and the force of air you want There are four speeds to choose from Moving the lever between LOW and HIGH will decrease or increase the fan speed The fan will be off when the system is off Temperature Lever This lever adjusts the temperature of the air coming through the system Move the TEMPERATURE lever to change the temperature of the air coming through your ou
111. Tortie Hess 2 70 Pressure Gage 0 00 0 eevee eee eee 2 67 In Foreign Countries 6 5 Pressure Light 0 00 nananana naran 2 67 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 0000 6 59 Used i Sel teats es boul eV ea SRM aaa EX EE 6 15 What Kind to Use 2 eee eee eee 6 13 When to Change 0 0 0 c eee eese 6 14 9 4 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 2 64 Engine Oil Pressure 0 00 00 0 eae 2 67 Fuel escai penitus d ew deer oso gode e teas Eevee 2 70 GAWR Lilia runda tid oaar EERDCEC HARI EE grs 4 30 Gear Positions Automatic Transaxle 2 24 Glove BOX are cb ee ae gee tay eb kon RR t e bed 2 51 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0000 4 30 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 00 4 30 Guide en Fran ais 0 ee ee ii GVWR seioed etha RR ERRARE UI SOY des 4 30 Hatogen B lbs i ke ERREUR ER 6 31 Hazard Warning Flashers 00 0000000 5 2 Head Restraints 0 0 eee eee ee 1 4 Headlamps ais 6 oe be Rex be cated RR 2 40 Ang essene reie nas Rope DAR ee PSU PNE 6 34 Bulb Replacement 0 00000000 6 32 High Low Beam Changer sssse 2 35 On Reminder i e Ree ER veg dike Pees 2 41 WATS gasei saa a Rad RE EU EO eds 6 58 Hearing Impaired Customer Assistance 8 4 Heating so eerie ORE UR X HP Re Yes 3 7 High Beam Headlamp
112. a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel see Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away on
113. aches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transaxle fluid change both the fluid and filter yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 21 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 22 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintena
114. acing child seat 1 37 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 blue AW155017 j AW155018 A booster seat F G is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs or even up to 80 Ibs 18 to 27 kg or even up to 36 kg and about four to eight years of age A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Booster seats with shields use lap only belts however booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window 1 38 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that Both the owner s manual and the child restraint instructions are important so if either one of these is not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer yellow blue Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restr
115. ada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Buick encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Buick the letter should be addressed to Buick s Customer Relations Center United States Buick Customer Relations Center P O Box 5039 Troy MI 48098 1 800 521 7300 1 800 832 8425 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 252 1112 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations GMODC Customer Communication Centre 169 007 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 905 644 4112 Fax 905 644 4866 Caribbean Numbers 1 800 496 9992 English Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Puerto Rico 1 800 751 4135 English Dominican Republic 1 800 751 4136 Spanish Dominican Republic 1 800 496 9994 U S Virgin Islands 1 800 389 0009 Bahamas 1 800 534 0122 Bermuda Barbados Antigua amp B V I yellow blue If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean call Puerto Rico 1 787 763 1315 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptiv
116. ained in the rear rather than the front seat We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 1 39 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Top Strap A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags AV 155001 Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wher
117. akes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine e Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Letup on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 38 yellow blue Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid don t overfill engine oil drive belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating in the Index First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 12 Cooling System 5 3 Other Warning Devices 5 19 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 3 Jump Starting 5 20 Changing a Flat Tire 5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 32 Compact Spare Tire 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 32 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice
118. ammed in Mode 3 Use the following procedure to change modes 1 Close all the doors and turn the ignition on Keep all doors closed throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold LOCK on the driver s power door lock switch through Step 4 3 Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter The automatic door locks will remain in the current mode 4 Press the LOCK button on the transmitter again Each time the transmitter s LOCK button is pressed the mode will advance by one going from 3 to 0 to 1 etc Note The door locks will cycle according to the mode entered while customizing the memory door locks Mode 0 has no feedback 5 Release the power door lock switch The automatic door locks will remain in the most recent mode selected yellow blue Delayed Locking If Equipped This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of the vehicle When the power door lock switch is pressed with the key removed from the ignition and the driver s door open a chime will sound three times to signal that delayed locking is active When all doors have been closed the doors will lock automatically after five seconds If any door is opened before this the five second timer will reset itself once all the doors have been closed again Pressing the door lock switch twice within two seconds will override this feature Personal Choice Programming The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off for
119. an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 21 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph 14 to 24 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts 1 22 What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The s
120. anada is 1 800 668 5539 yellow blue 1999 BUICK SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 BUICK SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 90 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 1999 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Por
121. another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 13 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked 4 14 yellow blue In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Sk
122. ant alarm by unlocking the vehicle with a key Personal Choice Features The following list of features that are available on your vehicle can be programmed to each driver s preference for each of the key transmitters Memory Door Locks This feature programs your door locks to automatically lock or unlock when shifting in and out of PARK P Security Feedback This feature provides feedback to the driver when the vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless entry transmitter Delayed Locking This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of the vehicle When all doors have been closed the doors will lock automatically after five seconds Perimeter Lighting When the UNLOCK button on the key transmitter is pressed the headlamps parking lamps back up lamps and cornering lamps will turn on For more detailed information and programming instructions refer to the Index for each individual feature listed above Security Feedback This feature provides feedback to the driver when the vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless entry transmitter One of the following modes may be selected for each transmitter Mode Security Feedback 0 No feedback when locking or unlocking vehicle yellow blue Security Feedback No feedback when locking headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps if equipped flash when unlocking vehicle Headlamps parking lamps and cornering lamps
123. ap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot N CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine blue Power Steering Fluid POWER DO HOT OVEHRFILL P UBE OHLY APPROVED PLL M r A When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 25 How to Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
124. are inflated to the correct pressures See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details 7 33 At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 7 34 yellow blue Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transaxle Fluid in the Index A fluid l
125. arts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 33 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth you can destroy your transaxle For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index 5 34 yellow blue Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has traction control you should turn the system off See Traction Control System in the Index Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will
126. ay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds and SCAN will appear on the display Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press the AM FM button to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton yellow blue P SCAN Press this button to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press P SCAN again to stop scanning The radio will not stop at a preset station if the station is weak Setting the Tone BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into t
127. ber Trip Odometer sisi reseau hehe RH 2 58 Loading o on Ver Coe Trunk SIOfage xa cick eed ence e LOK seede CT TTC 2 14 Ventilation System Be eed ee oy boa Release Lockout Remote Release Remote Security Override TTY Users First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 IRI D I EE 2 15 Visor Vanity Mirrors OH AEC es AoE EER 2 14 Siege Sah cs se ce MC E O DUNS 21S Voltage Gage isses yellow blue 9 11 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Warning DEVICES is cor teary en Raa ED 353 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 59 Warranty Information 0 0 00 eee eee 8 8 Washer Fluid Windshield 00 0000 6 26 Washing Your Vehicle 0 00 00 00 ee eee 6 52 Weatherstrips 2 0 0 cece eee eee 6 52 Wheel Alignment eek seisce riistetty aiaiai as 6 46 Nut Torque sret tessa eeneg pei enueis 5 29 6 64 Replacement 2e dad sac m meret ts 6 46 Wheel Cover Removal 0 00000008 5 23 Wheel Nut Cap Removal 005 5 23 Wire Wheel Cover Removal ss 5 24 WEeDeD sco estet fetch tap Dre Pet Re Reps 5 22 Window Lock 412r nee MA peas a EE RE 2 33 9 12 MAandOWS 6 54 42 ha khe pP EI P ae E RR 2 33 Express Down 5s o e yx RE 2 33 li E 2 33 Windshield Washer 0 00 00 eee eee eee 2 37 Hluid Lese Rete ERR RIEN ed eens ex ER 6 26 Fluid Level Check
128. brakes Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary yellow blue Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the In
129. ce Record provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle Whenever any maintenance is performed be sure to write it down in this part This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done In addition it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts yellow blue The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services
130. ce the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed yellow blue Oil Pressure Light Gage Tri OIL Standard Cluster If your vehicle has the standard instrument panel cluster this light will come on if there is a problem with your engine oil pressure Gage Cluster If your vehicle has the optional gage cluster you can read your oil pressure directly from the gage on your instrument panel A small light to the left of the gage will come on if there is a problem with the engine oil pressure 2 67 The oil light could come on briefly when you turn your key to RUN It goes off once you turn it to START That s just a check to be sure the light works If it doesn t be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong But when this light comes on and stays on it means oil isn t going through your engine properly You could be low on oil or you might have some other oil problem See your dealer for service Don t keep driving if t
131. could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise in the jack Raise the vehicle far enough so there s enough room for the spare tire to fit 6 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 27 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 8 Place the compact spare tire on the wheel mounting surface 9 Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or 1
132. ction under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ohn H SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first i i See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 9 000 Miles 15 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 9 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 12 000 Miles 20 000 km E Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every
133. d service at every other tire rotation See Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km E Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE BERMES Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first Ed See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL ap j SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first i i See footnote Continued 7 25 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Ma
134. d and the horn will chirp two times 5 Release the door lock switch The perimeter lighting feature is now on This procedure only changes the mode for the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter 2 44 yellow blue Front Reading Lamps If Equipped Front seat reading lamps are turned on or off by pressing the LAMP switch Rear Reading Lamps If Equipped The lamp switch and a coat hanger are above each rear door Slide the switch to turn the lamp on or off Battery Rundown Protection This feature automatically turns off the interior lamps if any are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off or a door is left open This will keep your battery from running down This feature also shuts off the exterior lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is OFF You may override this feature for the exterior lamps by turning the lamps off and then back on after the ignition is turned to OFF If you do this the exterior lamps will stay on until you manually turn them off yellow blue If the feature is enabled for the interior and exterior lamps all lamps should turn off at approximately the same time Mirrors Day Night Manual Rearview Mirror With Integral Reading Lamps 2 45 When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle The day nig
135. d between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition and the radio are on the tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOLUME FADE BAL BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is off first press EJECT or RECALL Note that the cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc players will work in your cassette tape player 3 19 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Your tape bias is set automatically If E and a number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error E10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do
136. d service is required The Engine Oil Life Monitor determines the condition of the engine oil and lets you know when the oil should be changed See Engine Oil in the Index The Engine Oil Life Monitor receives information about engine speed coolant temperature and vehicle speed to determine how much the oil has degraded When to change your oil depends on your driving habits and conditions The CHANGE OIL SOON light may turn on as early as 2 000 miles 3 218 km or less for harsh circumstances yellow blue For additional information see Engine Oil When to Change in the Index To reset the Oil Life Monitor see Engine Oil Life Monitor in the Index Cruise Light The cruise light comes on whenever you set your cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index CRUISE Washer Fluid Low Light If Equipped When the vehicle has a low fluid condition this light will come on to remind you to get more washer fluid soon WASHER FLUID LOW 2 69 Trunk Ajar Light If Equipped This light comes on if your vehicle s trunk is not completely closed TRUNK AJAR Fuel Gage EW FB Standard Cluster Gage Cluster Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your tank It works only when the engine is on When the indicator nears EMPTY E you still have a little fuel left You need to get more fuel right away 2 70 yellow blue Here are some things that some owners ask abo
137. d until the SECURITY light goes off If the SECURITY light comes on for one minute and then shuts off while the ignition is on the security system has detected a problem with itself See your dealer for service If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off It will also go off if the trunk lock is damaged Your vehicle s lamps will flash and the horn will sound for one minute and then will go off in order to save battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with a door open or the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off You must still shut off the alarm by inserting the key in the door lock or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system lock the door by using the door key or the manual door lock switch Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry system transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm yellow blue If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with your key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK o
138. degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced yellow blue Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism 3 35 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Heated Backlite Antenna Your AM FM antenna is integrated with your rear window defogger located in the rear window Be sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage
139. dex Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables 7 37 Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks Inspect other brake parts including drums wheel cylinders calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection If you operate your vehicle in a highly corrosive environment as indicated by the shaded areas on the map following this text your vehicle may require additional brake service Refer to the appropriate GM Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection proced
140. dio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your Delco Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears You may set the clock with the ignition off if you press RECALL first and follow the same procedure described above Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Press the upper knob briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock To change what is normally shown on the display station or time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes If you press the knob when the ignition is off the clock will show for a few seconds 3 12 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Finding a Station AM FM Press the AM FM button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations SEEK Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and st
141. drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 yellow blue Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on
142. dvise if you think something should be added When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Most trips are through dusty areas You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower How to Reset the Engine Oil Life Monitor Option After changing the engine oil the Engine Oil Life Monitor should be reset It will not reset itself This will cause the CHANGE OIL SOON light to be lit for a bulb check period of three seconds Refer to Engine Oil in the Index to determine what type of oil to use yellow blue To reset the Oil Life Moni
143. e equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 When calling from the United States please dial 1 905 644 3063 8 5 Roadside Assistance Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered under the 3 year 36 000 mile 60 000 km new car warranty whichever occurs first yellow blue Our commitment to Buick owners has always included superior service through our network of over 2 800 Buick dealers Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an extra measure of convenience and security BUICK PREMIUM ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Provides owners with access to minor repairs or towing for disabled vehicles Although Roadside Assistance is not a repair facility it is a means of assisting customers in an emergency situation Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing easy access to service professionals trained to work with
144. e GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco Genuine Parts Eq Goodwrench yellow blue Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wi
145. e Owner s Manual 1999 Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 10 yellow blue How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat to see how see Seats in the Index so you can sit up straight Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you
146. e sists sce iaa e a aed nd 2 65 Check Oil Eevel ed eot RR eR 2 68 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 2 64 Engine Oil Pressure Light suse 2 67 Low Fuel o RR RR ERR niter ee 2 70 Oil Pressure siii danne s onian ae E eiea 2 67 9 6 Safety Belt Reminder 004 2 59 Traction Control System Warning 2 63 4 9 Traction Off Warning 0 002 e eee 4 9 Loading Your Vehicle 0000000000 4 30 Lockout Protection 0 0 0 eee eee eee 2 8 EOCKRS hn yeh serach stein ice alse ec quatieuclectoe trate E 2 4 Cylinders 1 erecto eet Re e eee 7 34 Delayed Locking 2 2 eere 2 6 Door ur er ieee fr tex one te ee ee dn ties lotti s 2 4 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check 7 36 Key Lock Cylinder Service usse 7 34 Lockout Protection 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 8 Memory DOoot 5 uar erm e n le Fac ae 2 5 Power Door 5 06 rho eee eh exer 2 5 Rear Door Security oers ie r cnnset e iera eee eee 2 8 Tr nk piene rn E ET are le 2 14 Window scere er n P RETE Meds E REAS 2 33 Low Fuel Light 2 iacere een Re 2 70 Lubricants and Fluids 0 00 00 000 0005 7 39 Lubrication Service Body 00000 7 34 Mo agnasteer DER 4 10 Maintenance Normal Replacement Parts 6 65 Maintenance Record 00 cece eee eee 7 41 Maintenance Schedule 0 00 00 0008 7 1 Long Trip Highway Def
147. e system and you should see your dealer for service Sun and temperature sensors automatically adjust the air temperature the airflow direction and the fan speed to maintain your comfort setting The system may supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle toward the sun Be careful not to put anything over the sensors on top of the dash Temperature Button To adjust the comfort level you want maintained inside the vehicle push the TEMP button If you want a warmer comfort level push the red arrow If you want a cooler comfort level push the blue arrow Your comfort setting is shown in the display Fan Button The speed of the blower fan is controlled automatically if you have the system set for AUTO Pressing the FAN button will display and hold the current blower fan setting If you want the blower fan to run at a lower speed push the bottom of the FAN button The fan speed will decrease with every push of the button until the lowest speed is reached If you want to increase the fan speed push the top of the FAN button Notice the fan indicators in the display Mode Controls Press the AIR FLOW button to deliver air through the floor middle or windshield outlets The system will stay in the selected mode until the AUTO button is pushed Use the up and down arrows on the AIR FLOW button to cycle through the available modes yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Automatic Operation Pres
148. ear window NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the rear defogger grid The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Passenger Control If Equipped If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system the front seat passenger can control the air temperature in their seating area The temperature can be set up to 5 F or 3 C cooler or warmer than the primary setting To activate the passenger control simply press the COOL or WARM buttons located on the passenger s door The indicator lights above the control will show the difference from the main temperature setting If the passenger control has been turned on it can be turned off by pressing the OFF button once Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the main system First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use VENT on the electronic touch system or manual operation on the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system to direct outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through the middle instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it s moving When the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any air choice except the
149. earview Mirror with Compass If Equipped Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside rearview mirror with a compass When set in the MIRROR position this mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A time delay feature prevents rapid changing from the day to night positions while driving under lights and through traffic yellow blue The mirror also includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face When on the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary Mirror Operation 2 47 The right side of the switch located at the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off To turn on the automatic dimming feature press MIRROR To turn off automatic dimming press MIRROR again The green indicator light will be illuminated when this feature is active Compass Operation Press the COMPASS button once to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading If after two seconds the d
150. easing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Push the SET button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts briefly move the switch to R A and then release it Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster The accelerate feature will only work after you have set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts push the SET button briefly Each time you do this you ll go 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier yellow blue Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the
151. ed by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS Key II system If you lose or damage a PASS Key II ignition key see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key II to have a new key made In an emergency call the Buick Premium Roadside Assistance Center at 1 800 252 1112 In Canada call 1 800 268 6800 yellow blue New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 19 Ignition Positions Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in the vehicle with children With the ignition key in the ignition switch you can turn the switch to five different positions 2 20 yellow blue ACCE
152. ed position If you try to drive approximately 40 feet 12 2 m with the parking brake on the brake light stays on and a chime sounds until you release the parking brake NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section explains what to do first to keep the trailer from moving 2 27 yellow blue Shifting Into PARK P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this Pull the lever toward you 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 28 Move the lever up as far as it will go Turn the ignition key to LOCK Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P yellow blue Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangero
153. ed wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 6 54 yellow blue Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these ma
154. edometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in Buick dealerships all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 22 yellow blue Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actuall
155. em warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 62 Traction Control System Warning Light Option This warning light should come on briefly as you start TRACTION the engine If the warning light doesn t come on then OFF have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If it stays on or comes on when you re driving there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly yellow blue The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons If you turn the system off by pressing the button located to the left of the steering column the warning light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again The warning light should go off See Traction Control System in the Index for more information If
156. ement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 47 yellow blue Tire Chains Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some NOTICE are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your you must Use only SAE Class S type chains vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings that are the proper size for your tires Install and instructions And always open your doors or them on the front tires and tighten them as windows when you re cleaning the inside Use tire chains only where legal and only when tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain Never use these to clean your vehicle manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the Gasoline chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten Benzene them If the contact continues slow down until it Naphtha stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some
157. emperature When the system is off the blower fan is also off MAX This setting directs airflow through the middle instrument panel outlets The amount of outside air entering your vehicle is limited with this setting The air conditioning compressor is on in this mode yellow blue NORM This setting cools the outside air entering your vehicle and directs it through the middle instrument panel outlets The air conditioner is on in this mode BI LEV This setting directs warm air to the floor and cooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets The air conditioner is on in this mode Dual Automatic Comfortemp Climate Control If Equipped If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp Climate Control option the following information tells you how it works You will hear a beep each time a button is pushed and a light on the button will indicate which function is active The lights are on all buttons except TEMP FAN and AIR FLOW The display will show fan speed comfort level setting and airflow direction for a few seconds whenever AUTO is selected and then it will display the outside temperature The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving During stops the display shows the previous temperature for best accuracy and system control First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 If the display is flashing after the climate control system is started there is a problem with th
158. en you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index yellow blue When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 43 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Tire Loading Information label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and
159. ensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot t
160. ent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside To Use One of These Locks 1 Open the rear door you wish to lock 2 Move the lever located on the door edge all the way up to the ENGAGED position 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door lock The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use yellow blue To Open a Rear Door When the Security Lock is On 1 Unlock the door 2 Then open the door from the outside If you don t cancel the security lock feature adults or older children who ride in the rear seat won t be able to open the rear door from the inside You should let adults and older children know how these security locks work and how to cancel the locks To Cancel the Rear Door Lock 1 Unlock the door and open the door from the outside 2 Move the lever all the way down 3 Do the same for the other rear door The rear door locks will now work normally Lockout Protection The power door locks will not work if the key is left in the ignition with the driver s door open You can override this feature by holding the power door lock switch for more than three seconds unless the engine is running Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from the inside Then get out and close the door Or you may also use the LOCK button on the remote keyless en
161. er rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 29 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Continued Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See
162. er a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player SOURCE Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on TAPE PLAY with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will play CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset yellow blue AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped ag ge AH FA Playing the Radio VOLUME Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease the volume 3 21 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 RECALL Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock To change what is normally shown on the display station or time press the button until you see
163. er and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape 3 16 If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to work The sound will mute while seeking NEXT 2 Press this button to search for the next selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to work The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK left and right arrows will also find the previous and next selections on the tape 3 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape reverses Pp 4 Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape advances yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 SIDE 5 Press this button to change the side of the tape that is playing DMO 6 Press this button to reduce background noise
164. erly How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle you will probably want to get the service information See Service and Owner Publications in the Index yellow blue Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenan
165. errent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure NOTE If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 1 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off 4 Press the and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down 5 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 7 Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree with your code yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 8 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code 9 Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the igni
166. ery 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Chassis Lubrication or 6 months whichever occurs first Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Transaxle Service normal conditions Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance is true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower 7 6 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7
167. ery 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 17 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote
168. estraint take into consideration not only the child s weight and size but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used An infant car bed A is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle It s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface With an infant car bed make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 35 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue A rear facing infant restraint B positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 lbs 9 kg and about one year of age This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant s head neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash Some infant seats come in two parts the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable 1 36 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue A forward facing child restraint C E positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and about 26 to 40 inches 66 to 102 cm in height or up to around four years of age One type a convertible restraint is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward f
169. eturn to them and MANUAL will appear Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers yellow blue FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in The disc should begin playing If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is off first press EJECT or RECALL If you re driving on a very rough road or if it s very hot the disc may not play and an error code may appear on the display When things get back to normal the disc should play If the disc comes out it could be that E20 The disc is upside down E20 It is dirty scratched or wet e E20 There s too much moisture in the air Wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 23 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 PREV 1 Press this button to go to the start of the current track if more tha
170. etween you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline yellow blue REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 521 7300 or write Buick Customer Relations Center P O Box 5039 Troy MI 48098 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 10 yellow blue Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals owner s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles The toll free telephone number for ordering information in C
171. ever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored If you need to have an anchor installed you can ask your dealer to put it in for you If you want to install an anchor yourself your dealer can tell you how to do it Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored 1 40 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue If your child restraint has a top strap your dealer can 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or instructions specifically designed for this vehicle The around the restraint The child restraint instructions dealer can then install the anchor for you This work will will show you how be done for you free of charge Or you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position any X 01H0 1106 e 7 You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructio
172. f it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transaxle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about swa
173. f the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be arrows on the pressure cap line up like this very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 19 F
174. f the transmitter with your vehicle If the transmitter does not work resynchronize the transmitter Resynchronization After replacing the battery in your transmitter or if only the instant alarm works the transmitter needs to be resynchronized to the receiver Do this by pressing and holding both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for about eight seconds You must be within range of the vehicle Once the transmitter has been resynchronized the horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once The system should now operate properly 2 13 Trunk It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index 2 14 yellow blue Trunk Lock Release To unlock the trunk from the outside insert the door key and turn it clockwise Remote Trunk Release ag The TRUNK release button is
175. find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care Service Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Automatic Transaxle Fluid Radiator Pressure Cap Engine Coolant Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires 1 1 1 1 PANN NNADH DDDDDPDDADDRDADDDPD BRWWNYNNNNK O0 Un CA CO Pb oc 6 48 6 49 6 51 6 51 6 51 6 54 6 54 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 57 6 58 6 63 6 64 6 64 6 65 Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning Glass Surfaces Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Cleaning Aluminum Wheels IF EQUIPPED Cleaning Tires Sheet Metal Damage Finish Damage GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerants Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuin
176. fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index yellow blue Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like gasoline oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release yellow blue To open the hood first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle It is next to the parking brake pedal near the floor yellow blue The
177. g hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 45 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 46 yellow blue Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels
178. ged Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid yellow blue Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200
179. h oA w amp Tensioner yellow blue Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 23 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 3 How This Section is Organized 7 33 Part B Owner Checks and Services 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 37 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 4 Using Your Maintenance Schedule 7 39 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 4 Selecting the Right Schedule 7 41 Part E Maintenance Record 7 7 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details yellow blue Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle prop
180. he following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare you could damage the cover or the spare Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible Store the jack and wheel wrench in their box in the trunk on the passenger s side 5 30 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can See Compact Spare Tire later in this section See the storing instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly 5 31 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up
181. he Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gi
182. he center cap pry off the center cap First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue ie 3 Remove the Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire a theft deterrent nut by 4 placing the key end of the wire wheel key wrench over the nut and turning it counterclockwise 4 Pull off the wire wheel cover Store it in the trunk until the flat tire is repaired or replaced NOTE When replacing the wheel cover carefully line up the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover 1 Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts but don t remove them 5 25 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue A OW J s NOTCHES 2 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise by hand to raise the jack head until it fits under the vehicle 8 20 cm 3 Put the jack into a notch in the frame which is located near each wheel well The front notch is 10 inches 25 cm back from the front wheel well The rear notch is 8 inches 20 cm forward from the rear wheel well 4 Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly on the ridge in the vehicle s frame nearest the flat tire Do not raise the vehicle yet Put the compact spare tire near you 5 26 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you
183. he oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced 2 68 yellow blue NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Check Oil Level Light If Equipped The CHECK OIL LEVEL light turns on for three seconds as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to RUN If the light doesn t turn on have your vehicle serviced CHECK OIL LEVEL If the engine oil is more than one quart 0 95 L low and the engine has been shut off for at least eight minutes the CHECK OIL LEVEL light will turn on for about one minute and will then remain off until the next time you start the vehicle If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light turns on the engine oil should be checked at the dipstick then brought up to the proper level if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index Change Oil Soon Light If Equipped This light is activated by the Engine Oil Life Monitor System CHANGE OIL SOON The CHANGE OIL SOON light turns on for three seconds as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to RUN It will stay on for 60 seconds once 90 percent of the oil life has been used and each time the engine is started after that If the CHANGE OIL SOON light is on continuously there is a problem with the Engine Oil Life Monitor System an
184. he right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane yellow blue At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply 4 21 The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your spe
185. heir stored positions when you re not using them Adjusting the Speakers BAL Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers 3 13 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume 3 14 RECALL Press the upper knob briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock To change what is normally shown on the display station or time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes If you press the knob when the ignition is off the clock will show for a few seconds Finding a Station AM FM Press the lower knob to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations SEEK Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds and SCAN will appear on the display
186. ht adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you The integral reading lamps are turned on or off by pressing the toggle switch at the bottom of the mirror These lamps are also part of the courtesy lamps described earlier in this section Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror If Equipped Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic day night rearview mirror When this feature is turned on the mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror face senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare this change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced 2 46 yellow blue Mirror Operation To turn on the automatic dimming feature press AUTO To turn off automatic dimming press OFF The green indicator light will be illuminated when this feature is active Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to the day position This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary Electrochromic Day Night R
187. ice See footnote 7 11 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 12 yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation
188. idding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the traction control system remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid If you do not have traction control or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a
189. ies Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline yellow blue While refueling hang the tethered cap from the hook on the fuel door To remove the cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise The cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your
190. if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation The driver s door will unlock when UNLOCK is pressed If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds all doors will unlock Pressing the UNLOCK button will also illuminate the interior lamps See Illuminated Entry in the Index 2 10 yellow blue All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed The trunk will unlock when the trunk symbol is pressed when the ignition is in OFF The trunk symbol will also work when the ignition is on but only while the transaxle is in PARK P Instant Alarm When the button with the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to one minute This can be turned off by pressing the instant alarm button again or by turning the ignition on If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Theft Deterrent feature you may also turn off the inst
191. imed properly read all the instructions before beginning Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage to headlamp parts 6 34 The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly level surface If necessary pads may be used on an uneven surface The vehicle should not have any snow ice or mud attached to it The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done There should not be any cargo or loading of the vehicle except it should have a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs 75 kg on the driver s seat Close all doors Tires should be properly inflated Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near the headlamps yellow blue A Horizontal Aiming Screw B Vertical Aiming Screw Start with the horizontal aim The adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx socket or T15 Torx screwdriver Once the horizontal aim is adjusted then adjust the vertical aim 6 35 B Vertical Aiming Screw 6 36 1 Turn the horizontal aiming screw A until the indicator C is lined up with zero A Horizontal Aiming Screw C Indicator D Level Bubble yellow blue 2 Turn the vertical aiming screw B until the level bubble D is lined up with zero Front Turn Signal The front turn signal bulbs can be
192. inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it yellow blue road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because 7 TAL T y 7 7j y even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be Mh 7 lj 7 y your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads UA 77 HEART Hf vk YW Ih 4 cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The iW ior SPA S ud i zn Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get J ff T surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 17 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them 4 18 yellow
193. inition 7 6 Long Trip Highway Intervals 0 7 6 Owner Checks and Services 05 7 33 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 37 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 39 Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 4 Short Trip City Definition 0 7 5 Short Trip City Intervals leeslessees 7 5 yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Maintenance Underbody 0000 6 55 Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4 38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 0 2 65 Manual Front Seat 0 0 0 0 rii eee eee 1 2 Manual Remote Control Mirror 2 50 Maxifuse Relay CENTET use oae sto ates duct pod teas 6 58 Memory Door Locks 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 2 5 Personal Choice Programming 2 5 Remote PEN a a Gantt I tei ncend dias Aker be nee 2 9 Methanol 254r em docere mem Y URS wae eee 6 4 MIT OIS aee beam PUR E POPE UE RES 2 46 Automatic Dimming Heated Outside 2 51 Convex Outside a resang eh ree Rer RES PES 2 50 Day Night Rearview with Reading Lamps 2 46 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview 2 46 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview With Compass ii iss sivas TERRI PAY es ea 2 47 Manual Remote Control 2005 2 50 Power Remote Control esses 2 50 Visor
194. install adjust and maintain them properly Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s brake system If you do both brake systems won t work well or at all 4 35 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns 4 36 yellow blue Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer y
195. int System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If your seat adjuster won t work after a crash the special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section yellow blue yellow blue Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Keys 2 31 Engine Exhaust 2 4 Door Locks 2 32 Running Your Engine While You re Parked 2 9 Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped 2 33 Windows 2 14 Trunk 2 33 Horn 2 15 Theft 2 34 Tilt Wheel 2 16 Universal Theft Deterrent If Equipped 2 34 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 18 PASS Key II 2 40 Exterior Lamps 2 19 New
196. intenance 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Continued Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote 77 24 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See
197. ions If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index If this occurs return to your authorized Buick dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing MMT are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized Buick dealer for service 6 4 yellow blue To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing your emission control system to function properly Therefore you should
198. ip or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Buick Customer Relations Center by calling 1 800 521 7300 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage yellow blue When contacting Buick please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you must file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for informatio
199. irst Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and To be even more certain the vehicle won t move change a tire you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 20 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Turn the center retainer bolt on the spare tire cover counterclockwise to remove it Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Lift and remove the cover See Compact Spare Tire in the Index for more information about the compact spare Remove the spare tire from the trunk The equipment you ll need is in the trunk Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk 5 21 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue The box that stores the jack and wheel wrench is on the passenger side trunk wall
200. isplay does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item 2 48 yellow blue Compass Calibration If the letter C should ever appear in the compass window the mirror may need calibration The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction or Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance 1 Press and hold the COMPASS button located at the bottom of the mirror until a zone number appears in the display 2 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map Press the COMPASS button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing
201. it breaker will stop the motor until it cools Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely To avoid damage be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If your blades do become damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer At the top of the turn signal multifunction lever there s a paddle with the word PUSH on it To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle briefly The wipers will clear the window and either stop or return to your preset speed For more washer cycles push and hold the paddle In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more me without keeping your foot NES on the accelerator This is M WIPER imt S zi helpful on long trips L3 Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes the cruise control shuts off With cruise control you can yellow blue Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless whee
202. itters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter For battery replacement use one Duracell battery type DL 2032 or a similar type yellow blue To replace the battery 1 Insert a coin into the notch near the key ring Turn the coin counterclockwise to separate the two halves of the transmitter 2 Once the transmitter is separated use a pencil eraser to remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Remove and replace the battery Replace it as the instructions inside the cover indicate 4 Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter 5 Test the operation o
203. ity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart yellow blue RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE E7 FOR HOT FOR THIS GASOLINE E WEATHER SYMBOL 3 CERTIFIED F 7777 SAE 10W 30 PREFERRED above 0 F 18 C SAE 5W 30 COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6 13 As shown in the chart SAE 10W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 5W 30 if it s going to be colder than 60 F 16 C before your next oil change When it s very cold you should use SAE 5W 30 These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 6 14 yellow blue Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil Your dealer is ready to a
204. ity pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 42 yellow blue Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading Information label Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident Wh
205. ked into position First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body gt 4 SOK AON i NS WZ LA The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 13 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 14 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs
206. killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking yellow blue Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 yellow blue Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration Bu
207. l spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System in the Index When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on 2 37 Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use it 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 2 38 yellow blue Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can briefly move the cruise control switch from ON to R A resume accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A Incr
208. l Lamps 3057 Rear Outside Lamps 6 Fuel Pump Back Up Lamps eee 3156 7 Injectors Tall oe eh ke Mohs aig eh Rot aloe as ates Sg oe 194 8 Powertrain Control Module Tail Stop Turn Signal lamps 3357 9 Not Used For service information on other bulbs contact your 10 Not Used dealer s service department 11 A C Programmer 12 Not Used 6 63 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information 3800 Series II Engine L36 Code K 3 8L V6 Automatic Transaxle Overdrive Pan Removal and Replacement 6 0 quarts 5 6 L After Complete Overhaul 10 quarts 9 5 L When draining or replacing torque convertor more fluid may be needed Cooling System 13 quarts 12 3 L Engine Crankcase 4 5 quarts 4 3 L Oil change with filter change Fuel Tank 18 gallons 68 1 L Tire Pressures See Tire Loading Information label on driver s door Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m R 134a Air Conditioning See refrigerant charge label under the hood All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the appropriate level as recommended in this manual 6 64 yellow blue Engine Specifications 3800 Series II Engine L36 Code K VIN Engine Code 00 00 0
209. l identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration yellow blue Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on your spare tire cover It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 57 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload wi
210. ld restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right A child in a rear facing child restraint can be Front Seat Position seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates even though your Ny vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags This hy is because the back of the rear facing child x d1L0102 restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never forward facing child restraint in the right front seat put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 1 45 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt th
211. ll cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp system checked right away 6 58 yellow blue Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Accessories Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Maxifuse Relay Center To check the fuses in this underhood fuse center turn the two knobs one quarter turn counterclockwise and loosen the metal wing nut on the passenger side of the cover Then remove the cover The inside of the cover has a chart that explains the features and controls governed by each fuse and relay Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating
212. ll no sign of steam idle the engine for three Idle for long periods in traffic minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the Tow a trailer vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away If your air conditioner is on turn it off Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE or THIRD 3 5 11 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 blue Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what CAUTION you ll see An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Electric Engine Cooling Fans 5 12 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the NOTICE radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system When adding coolant it is important
213. ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions See Traction Control System in the Index If you don t have the traction control system accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have the anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers yellow blue If You re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
214. longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display 3 32 To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel Some steering wheel controls may operate climate controls See Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control earlier in this section SEEK Press this button to go to the next higher or lower radio station Press and hold this button again for two seconds and SCAN will appear Press it again to stop scanning First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 SCAN Press this button to scan the stations preset on your radio pushbuttons This feature works like your radio s P SCAN button and allows you to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press SCAN again to stop scanning If a preset station has weak reception the radio will not stop at the preset station AM FM Press this button to choose AM FM1 or FM2 VOL Press the up or
215. lt in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching NOTICE each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put your automatic 4 Open the hoods and locate the batteries transaxle in PARK P before setting the parking brake 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter Turn off all lamps that aren t needed as well An electric fan can start up even when the engine as radio
216. luding support for the head and neck This is necessary because an infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a frontal crash an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant s body the back and shoulders A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint This is so important that many hospitals today won t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby s first trip in a motor vehicle 1 33 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on your arms The baby would be almost impossible to hold Secure the baby in an infant restraint Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can t hold it For example in a crash CAUTION Continued 1 34 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints are available in four basic types When selecting a child r
217. mfort guide and use the safety belt To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 29 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow 1 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic the seatback and the interior body to remove the cord must be under the belt Then place the guide guide from its storage clip over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions on top earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Children Smaller Children and Babies Everyone in a vehicle needs protection That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size Neither the distance traveled nor the age a
218. ming Heated Outside Mirror 2 51 What Makes it Inflate 00 2000 1 22 Automatic Transaxle 2 24 What Will You See After it Inflates 1 23 Check use dae eR hoodies eH Mer et 7 34 When Should it Inflate 000 1 22 Bl id Lue tree hore le ste tee Gi 6 18 Air Cleaner ee eet exe Scher RR e pde dioe 6 16 Operation Mp 2 24 Air Conditioning 0 0c cee eee eee 3 6 Shif ng iussi e IERI UE REESE odes 2 24 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 0 6 64 OverdtiVe ceca etra toile nob cttm oe he 2 26 Air Control Climate Control System 3 2 3 4 Park Mechanism Check Lsssus 7 36 Alarm Instant Keyless Entry 00 2 10 Alarm Universal Theft Deterrent 2 16 B Alignment and Balance Tire occ sees Less 6 46 attery ccc 6 31 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 0000005 6 54 Jump Starting sees 5 3 Antenna Heated Backlite 0 0000 3 36 Replacement Remote Keyless Entry 2 12 Wali BORNE eS ce 2 acetates 6 22 Rundown Protection 00 0 e ce eee eee 2 45 Anti Lock Warning Light 0 cece eee eee ee eee oo Warnings sss iia eXeieswe a eva a ee 9 2 a BRO OUR MK iiie 8 3 Anti Theft Radio 00 000 0c ccc oee 3 30 Belt Engine Accessory os cass rence soe Metne heroes 9 09 Appearance Care 0 0 ccc cece see 6 48 Better Business Bureau Mediation
219. n the dipstick 1 Pull out the dipstick 2 Using a long neck funnel add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON III because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 3 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check 4 When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way 6 21 Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck When you replace your radiator pressure cap a GM cap is recommended Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature 6 22 yellow blue Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first
220. n automatically when you move the transaxle out of PARK P As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Cornering Lamps If Equipped The cornering lamps are designed to turn on when you signal a turn This will provide more lighting when cornering at night yellow blue Twilight Sentinel Twilight sentinel turns your lamps on and off by sensing TWILIGHT how dark it is outside SENTINEL ih MIU j To operate it leave the lamp switch off If you move the control all the way to MAX your headlamps will remain on for three minutes after you turn off your engine As you move the control toward MIN the headlamps will turn off more quickly when you turn off your engine You can change this delay time from only a few seconds to three minutes 2 41 The exterior lamps can be completely shut off while the vehicle is in PARK P by sliding the twilight sentinel control all the way toward MIN and release To turn the exterior lamps back on slide the control all the way toward MIN again and release or shift out of PARK P Light Sensor Your twilight sentinel and DRL work with the light sensor on top of the instrument panel Don t cover it up If you do the sensor will read dark and the headlamps will turn on 2 42 yellow blue Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Brightness Control The instrument panel intensity can be adjusted by moving
221. n eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking NEXT 2 Press this button to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the previous and next selections on the disc 3 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track You will hear sound gt P 4 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track You will hear sound RAND 6 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Press RAND again to turn off random play 3 24 yellow blue RECALL Press this button to see which track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the button until you see the display you want then hold the button until the display flashes AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player SOURCE Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on When a disc is inserted the disc will play until you press AM FM Then the disc will stop playing and the radio will play Press SOURCE again to play a disc again CD PLAY will show on the display
222. n go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release The hood latch is under the hood near the center and at the front edge of the grille Lift up on the lever as you lift up on the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then just pull the hood down and close it firmly yellow When you open the hood you ll see A Engine Coolant D Engine Oil Dipstick G Brake Master Cylinder Recovery Tank E Engine Oil Fill Cap H Air Cleaner B Battery F Automatic Transaxle L Windshield Washer C Radiator Pressure Cap Fluid Dipstick Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light on the instrument CH ECK panel comes on it means Ol L LEVEL you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see Check Oil Level Light in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground yellow blue The engine oil dipstick is right behind the engine fans and in front of the engine oil fill cap The top of the dipstick is a round yellow loop Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 6 11 yellow blue Checking Engine Oil
223. n on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program yellow blue Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Buick by dialing 1 800 83 BUICK TTY users in Can
224. n the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing You ll be using the lap belt Be sure to follow the child restraint in the right front passenger seat instructions that came with the child restraint Secure but before you do always move the front the child in the child restraint when and as the passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better Instructions SAY to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one 1 43 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt Ae RUL NE restant on thE geat 5 To tighten the belt pull its free end while you push 3 Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the down on the child restraint If you re using a restraint The child restraint instructions will show forward facing child restraint you may find it you how helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 44 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue To remove the chi
225. n the remote keyless entry transmitter if you have it The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm 1 From inside the vehicle roll down the window 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the car close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s lamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s lamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center 2 17 PASS Key II Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS Key II Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key II is a passive theft deterrent system It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition PASS Key II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that matches a decoder in your vehicle When the PASS Key II system senses that someone is using the wrong key it shuts down the vehicle s starter and fuel systems For about three minutes the starter won t work and fuel won t go to the engine If someone trie
226. nce item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage transaxle shift linkage parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points Tf your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor the monitor will show you when to change the engine oil and filter usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 7 500 miles 12 500 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months without an oil and filter change 7 23 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner if the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed For more information see CHANGE OIL SOON Light in the Index A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 24 If you drive in a highly corrosive environment your brake calipers may require additional inspection an
227. nd noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle yellow blue Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association AAMA and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines For more information write to American Automobile Manufacturer s Association 7430 Second Ave Suite 300 Detroit MI 48202 Be sure the posted octane is at least 87 If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specificat
228. nd size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in Children who are up against or very close to any every Canadian province says children up to some age air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured must be restrained while in a vehicle or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle 1 32 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child A very young child s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips as it should Instead the belt will likely be over the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force right on the child s abdomen which could cause serious or fatal injuries So be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint yellow blue Infants need complete support inc
229. needs service 13 Remove the cables in reverse order Take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed X 05 0607 S Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it Use only the correct hooks A Heavy Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery 5 8 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if NOTICE you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index Use the proper towing equipment to avoid Engine Overheating damage to the bumper fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle You will find a coolant light or a warning light about a hot engine on your vehicle s instrument panel If you have the optional gage cluster you may also have a With current trends in automotive styles and design it is coolant temperature warning gage See Engine Coolant essential that the correct towing equipment is used to Temperature Warning Light or Engine Coolant tow a vehicle Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift Temperature Gage in the Index Or car carrier equipment
230. ng Your Vehicle 4 15 Driving at Night 4 32 Towing a Trailer 4 17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index yellow blue Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and dri
231. ng a Trailer 4 37 On Hill and Mountain Roads 4 23 On Snow and Ice 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 26 Through Water sepson tares 0 e esa eee eee eee 4 19 Wet Roads ash snes aeacha na pos aes are E EE 4 17 WIDE sto wid sees nan atte desc eundo d atre Mickey e ips 4 25 With a Trailer i e e heec es 4 36 Drunken Driving 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 3 Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control 3 3 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Electrical Equipment Adding 3 34 6 58 Entry Lighting Delayed 0000 2 43 Electrical System scoi terie err RR hme 6 58 Ethanol 224 v esvaeev DR HERE EE NUEREPETEY EEG 6 4 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 46 Exhaust Engine 2 15 2 31 2 33 2 34 4 35 With Compass sasse cece mh hn 2 47 Exit Lighting Delayed 0 0000 2 43 Electronic Level Control 0 00 00 00005 4 31 Express Down Window 0 000 e eevee 2 33 Electronic Touch Climate Control 3 2 Exterior Lamps aaa eret heme dace tm cen 2 40 BN GIN evecta bene Ta hs eie p 6 10 Coden sae NM T NE I o PR UNIT ME 6 49 Coolant Heater 0 0 0000 cece cece ee eee 2 23 Fan Control Climate Control System 3 2 3 4 Coolant Level Check lt lt ccccccdecccccnccccus 7 33 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 7 Coolant Temperature Gage
232. ng the hose upward and away from the throttle body which is located near the top of the engine Disconnect the electrical connector from the air intake hose This will allow you to lift the rear portion of the air cleaner 4 After detaching the hose from the throttle body pull back the entire rear portion of the air cleaner by pulling upward and rearward yellow blue Replace the air filter Reinstall the rear section of the air cleaner Reconnect the electrical connector Du 6 7 8 Reattach the air intake hose by snapping it back onto the throttle body Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index S G Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving 6 18 yellow blue Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is chan
233. nings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom battery When it s time for a new battery we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt yellow blue Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index Bulb Replacement For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer s service department For the bulb types to be used in the following procedures see Replacement Bulbs in the Index Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructio
234. not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving You can also write us at the following address for advice Just tell us where you re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number VIN General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Filling Your Tank yellow blue The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver s side of your vehicle Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injur
235. ns on the bulb package 6 31 yellow blue Headlamps This procedure is for both the driver s and passenger s side headlamps 2 Slide the headlamp outboard until the pins are loose 3 Remove the headlamp assembly to access the bulbs 1 Use a 10 mm hex socket to remove two bolts retaining the headlamp assembly 6 32 yellow blue 4 Rotate the bulb retainer counterclockwise to remove 5 Pull the tabs away from the bulb base to remove the the bulb assembly bulb from the retainer 6 33 yellow blue Headlamp Aiming Your vehicle has a headlamp system equipped with horizontal and vertical aim indicators The aim has been pre set at the factory and should need no further adjustment This is true even though your vertical and horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the 0 zero marks on their scales If your vehicle is damaged in an accident the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers for horizontal aim or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you for vertical aim If you believe your headlamps need to be re aimed we recommend that you take it to your dealer for service however it is possible for you to re aim 6 Push the new bulb straight onto the retainer your headlamps as described in the following procedure 7 Reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly NOTICE To make sure your headlamps are a
236. ns or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 8 Don t let the other end of the cable touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one vs NS 7 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 9 Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal 10 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less 11 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 12 Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery Towing Your Vehicle If it won t start after a few tries it probably
237. ns that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and 3 Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed as the instructions say If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or 1 Put the restraint on the seat neck put it behind the child restraint 1 41 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 5 To tighten the belt pull up on the shoulder belt while 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is you push down on the child restraint If you re using positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the a forward facing child restraint you may find it safety belt quickly if you ever had to helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 42 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position NS A child in a child restraint in the center front seat Jr can be badly injured or killed by the right front X 0 o passenger air bag if it inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags 7 Never secure a child restraint i
238. nto it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For proper protection when the vehicle is in is moving motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too yellow blue It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or
239. o the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage transaxle shift linkage parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points Tf your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor the monitor will show you when to change the oil usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 7 500 miles 12 500 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first without an oil change 7 7 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner if the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor when the oil has been changed For more information see CHANGE OIL SOON Light in the Index A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 8 If you drive in a highly corrosive environment your brake calipers may require additional inspection and service at every other tire rotation See Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspe
240. o touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door yellow blue Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the sensors are activated and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service 1 23 First Edition for Buick LeSabre
241. oad and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 61 Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If you try to drive off with the parking brake set a chime will also come on until you release the parking brake If the light and chime stay on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem yellow blue Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system the light s will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light stays on turn the ignition to OFF Or if the light comes on when you re driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake syst
242. ocket one quarter turn into the assembly to lock it back into place 5 Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to install the new bulb assembly 8 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb assembly 6 39 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking See Wiper Blade Check in Section 7 of this manual under Part B Owner Checks and Services for more information yellow blue Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways Here s how to remove the type with a release hole 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the hole A and pull the blade assembly off the wiper arm B 3 Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm For the proper windshield wiper blade replacement length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your Buick Warranty booklet for details 6 40 AA i yellow blue Inflation Tire Pressure The Tire Loading Information label which is on the rear edge of the driver s door shows the correct Poorly maintained and improperly used tires inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold are dangerous
243. olvent Parking Brake Cable Guides Power Steering System 7 39 yellow blue USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Chassis Chassis Lubricant GM Part Hood and Door Multi Purpose Lubricant Lubrication No 12377985 or equivalent or Hinges Superlube GM Part lubricant meeting requirements of No 12346241 or equivalent NLGI 2 Category LB or z n GC LB Fuel Door Glove Multi Purpose Lubricant Box and Console Superlube GM Part Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Door Hinge and No 12346241 or equivalent Assembly GM Part No 12346293 or Rear Secondary Latch equivalent or lubricant meeting Compartment Pivots Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Lid Hinges a an aa Category LB or OG DH Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent 7 40 yellow blue Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on date odometer reading and who performed the service the following record pages Also you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio Any additional information from Owner Checks and is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANC
244. omically Your vehicle is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages GRUISE i IE 10 20 30 40 50 60 TO 80 90 100 Q SECURITY B m VO AVA VIZ ED Q wn 60 80 100 120 140 160 D E oO gt unteaneo FueL onty O O ol Pax RNDS 21 bee He oe o o 0000 EN rm Standard Cluster 2 56 yellow blue 50 NU Wy 60 1M p 0010 0 ON 140 ZA TRIP RPM X 1 909 UNLEADED FUEL ONLY E o OALOOOG e 160 2100 iL owl Pak RND 3214 9 M Gage Cluster 2 57 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer If you see bright silver lines between the numbers you ll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back The numbers may not be true You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer A trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven since you last set it to zero
245. on t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again If your vehicle has a center passenger position be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your lap shoulder belt If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the buckle for the center passenger position Supplemental Restraint System SRS This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system Your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger 1 18 yellow blue Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured o
246. on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower yellow blue If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 11 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
247. oose the extreme comfort setting of 60 F 16 C but the system will not cool any faster by choosing the extreme comfort setting When the air conditioner is on you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle s engine speed and power This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature yellow blue Heating If your vehicle has the electronic touch system on cold days use HTR with the TEMPERATURE lever toward WARM If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system and on cold days if the AUTO mode is selected the system will automatically direct the air toward the floor and the temperature door will be positioned at the full hot position You can choose the extreme comfort setting of 90 F 32 C but the system will not warm up any faster by selecting the extreme comfort setting If the outside temperature is cold the fan will be delayed to avoid blowing cold air Pushing the FAN AIR FLOW or FRONT buttons will override this delay turn off the AUTO mode and change the fan speed With each system outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor outlets The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger If you have the electronic touch system adjust the TEMPERATURE lever toward WARM and the FAN lever
248. op your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible The engine coolant temperature gage indicates the coolant temperature in degrees Fahrenheit The Canadian instrument panels indicate the coolant temperature in degrees Celsius See Engine Overheating in the Index Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light C CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction yellow blue NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transaxle exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those
249. ops For heavier loads store them in the trunk as far forward as you can You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter The front center and rear ashtrays may be removed for cleaning Hold the sides of the ashtray and then pull the ashtray up and out 2 51 NOTICE Don t put papers or other flammable objects into your ashtrays Hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them causing a damaging fire To use a lighter push the center all the way in and let it go When it is ready the center will pop back by itself Pull out the entire unit to use it NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overheat damaging the lighter and the heating element 2 52 yellow blue Sun Visors Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors If Equipped When you open the cover to either the passenger s or driver s visor vanity mirror the lamps will turn on The brightness of the lamp can be adjusted by sliding the switch up or down Dual Sun Visors Each sun visor has two parts so that both the windshield and door glass can be shaded at the same time To use the dual sun visors flip the first visor down and turn toward the window Then flip the second visor down toward the windshield OnStar System Option
250. or Snow 5 1 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off Press the button to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in To turn off the flashers pull out the collar When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please use the following steps to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you yellow blue NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco Freedom battery in your vehicle has a bui
251. oss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door hinges Also lubricate all hinges and latches including those for the hood glove box door and console door Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment yellow blue Starter Switch Check Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough around the vehicle room around the vehicle It should be parked on a 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake see Parking level surface Brake in the Index if necessary and the 2 Firmly apply the parking brake see Parking Brake regular brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter 3 With the engine off turn
252. ou ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working
253. out it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts The safety belt light will also come on and stay on FASTEN for about 70 seconds If the driver s belt is already BE LTS buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 2 59 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows AIR BAG The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your engine AIR and it will flash for a few B AG seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have
254. outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that 1 2041 T comes on as a reminder to FASTEN buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index BELTS First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop First Edi
255. ow almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment yellow blue To tow your vehicle follow these steps 1 Put the front wheels on a dolly Te SE Put the vehicle in PARK P Set the parking brake and then remove the key Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing Release the parking brake 4 29 Loading Your Vehicle a x GM TIRE LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP FRT CTR RR TOTAL K L 100 LOADING GVWR SAME AS aC D TIRE PRESSURE OT ADD 28KPA 4LBS S MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION M P Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry The Tire Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver s door tells you the proper size speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle It
256. pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 39 000 Miles 65 000 km a Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emission Control Service See footnote pm 42 000 Miles 70 000 km d c Uu i ETENIM Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first HEBES See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 17 13 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 50 000 Miles
257. r a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press P SCAN again to stop scanning If a preset station has weak reception the radio will not stop at the preset station AUTO SET Press this button and the system will seek and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM stations on your preset buttons depending on which band AM or FM you are listening to AUTO SET will flash while seeking and will remain on until this function is complete To return to the stations you manually set press AUTO SET again First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Setting the Tone BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them TONE This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical pop rock jazz talk and country western stations CLASS will appear on the display when you first press TONE Each time you press it another setting will appear on the display Press it again after C amp W appears and MANUAL will appear Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs Also if you use the BASS and TREB knobs control will r
258. r eee aces 7 34 Reverse Automatic Transaxle 0005 2 25 Right Front Passenger Position 4 1 18 Roadside Assistance 0 0 e cece eee eee eee 8 6 Roadside Assistance Canadian 8 6 Rocking Your Vehicle 0 00000 eee eee 5 34 Rotation Tires 0 0 0 6 42 yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Satety Belt Extenders cuc Re ERR RS 1 50 Safety Belts cerere angie evans EEr een RES URS 1 5 Adulis ee aa tette eoe babe eco bet a Sa 1 10 CATS Pr 6 51 Center Passenger Position 0 1 25 Children 122 ed eie per alae tet dete ato ecd 1 32 Driver Position esu rem mr memet ran 1 10 Extender e tere Rete ere 1 50 How to Wear Properly 000 000 2000 1 10 Incorrect Usage 00000 1 13 1 48 1 49 Lap Bele eel e Wiss pact DESEE Mae aces 1 25 Lap Shoulder sienien eir enne yetedi geni 1 11 1 26 Larger Children i e RRRERERRRSDPES 1 47 Questions and Answers 0 0e eee esses 1 9 Rear Comfort Guides 0 0 000000 1 29 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 26 Rear Seat Passengers 0 00000 000 0000s 1 26 Reminder Light cic wesc ng geecp new ead Vaan be 2 59 Replacing After a Crash 002000 1 50 Right Front Passenger Position 1 18 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1 12 Smaller Children and Babies
259. r glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Automatic Dimming Heated Outside Rearview Mirror If Equipped If you have this feature the outside mirrors will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic electrochromic day night rearview mirror See Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror earlier in this section When you operate the rear window defogger a defogger also warms the heated driver s and passenger s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice and snow Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box To open lift the latch release on the left side of the glove box door Center Console Cupholder Coinholder The armrest between the front seats opens into a storage area To open it press the lever at the front edge of the armrest upward yellow blue Inside a cupholder flips forward and unfolds to hold two cups The cupholder is designed to break away should it receive excessive pressure If it breaks away snap the edges back into place There is also a removable coinholder cassette tape and compact disc storage area Convenience Net If Equipped Your vehicle may have a convenience net You ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk Put small loads like grocery bags behind the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and st
260. r killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All air bags even Next Generation air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They CAUTION Continued First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for unrestrained occupants Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with Next Generation air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle yellow blue Children
261. r parking lamp switch on remove the key from the ignition and open the driver s door you will hear a continuous warning chime The chime will turn off when the lamps are turned off Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and twilight sentinel so be sure it isn t covered The DRL system will make your high beam headlamps turn on at reduced brightness in daylight when The ignition is on The headlamp switch is off and The transaxle is not in PARK P When the DRL are on only your high beam headlamps will be on The parking lamps taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on Your instrument panel lights won t be on either When it is dark enough outside your low beam headlamps will come on The other lamps that turn on with your headlamps will also turn on When it is bright enough outside the regular lamps will go off and your high beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness of DRL To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are parked turn off the headlamps and move the twilight sentinel control all the way toward MIN The exterior lamps will turn back o
262. r vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty 2 25 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE Here are some times you might choose THIRD 3 instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE When driving on hilly winding roads When towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears When going down a steep hill SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on 2 26 yellow blue NOTICE Don t drive in SECOND 2 for more than 5 miles 8 km or at speeds over 55 mph 90 km h or you can damage your transaxle Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
263. rake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you are parking on a hill and if you re pulling a trailer also see Towing a Trailer in the Index Windows Power Windows Switches on the driver s armrest control each of the windows while the ignition is on In addition each passenger door has a switch for its own window yellow blue Express Down Window The switch for the driver s window has an express down feature Pull the switch back all the way release it and the window will lower automatically To stop the window from lowering pull the switch again To partially open the window pull the switch back and quickly release it To raise the window hold the switch forward Window Lock Press the LOCK switch on the driver s armrest to disable all passenger window switches The driver s window controls will still be operable This is a useful feature when you have children as passengers Press the UNLOCK switch to allow passengers to use their window switches again Horn Nearly
264. rear window defogger and any fan speed Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the louvered vents 3 10 If you have the rear passenger comfortemp option you can adjust the direction of the airflow to the rear seating area yellow blue First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Ventilation Tips Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or Control If Equipped any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work better reducing the chance of fogging your windows If your vehicle has this feature you can control the temperature function by using the button on your steering wheel Press the TEMP up arrow to increase the temperature and the TEMP down arrow to decrease the temperature Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle When the engine idles for a long time the exterior temperature sensor may cause the system to blow air that is too cool Once the vehicle is moving again the system will try to maintain the set temperature inside your vehicle When you start your vehicle and the EXT display flashes Dual Automatic Comfortemp system only for some time the system may need repair See your dealer 3 11 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Audio Systems AM FM Stereo Your Delco Electronics au
265. recovery tank See Engine the recommended coolant and the proper Coolant in the Index for more information coolant mixture Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 14 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pres
266. require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut 4 16 yellow blue down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the
267. rough or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 5 Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 46 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow 6 To tighten the belt feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat But they need to use the safety belts properly
268. s 00005 2 35 Highway Hypnosis eene 4 23 Hill and Mountain Roads 0 0 00005 4 23 Hitches Trailer llli 4 35 Hood Checking Things Under 00 6 8 Release 5 idem Rete re RESP gie 6 8 HO mm 2 33 Hydroplanmng oe i eR rep Ree RR RR 4 19 yellow blue Toiton Positions duces ere RA RPSPEeHRER URN 2 20 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check sue 7 36 Illuminated Entry 00 0 0 ee eee eee eee 2 43 Inflation Tite ss perona oa sce ete Rh edes 6 41 Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 46 Inspections ssec 20 0 eee IIIA 7 37 Brake System essel ees 7 38 Caliper Knuckle 0 0 0 cece eee eee 7 38 Engine Cooling System 0 005 7 37 Exhaust System 44x eek eor tree naci EES 7 37 Front Drive Axle Boot 0 00 0000 7 37 Front Drive Axle Seal 00 008 7 37 NIC DAMES P Em 7 37 SUSPENSION eese eese nm 7 37 Throttle System 5 e Lx ere RR EYE 7 37 Instrument Panel eese en 2 54 Brightness Control lleel esses 2 43 Cleaning viii se viaea RU prd e ue EE 6 51 Cluster nice eee RIO echoed 2 56 2 57 Interior Lamps sleeeeeeee eee eee 2 43 J ACK Tire 24 be BRE E E dre ook 5 22 Jump Starting ss oss y less cha epherapadds ons dees 5 3 Key Lock Cylinders Service 00005 7 34 Key Reminder Warning lesse esses 2 21 Keyless Entry Sy
269. s This will avoid sparks and help save both is not running and can injure you Keep hands batteries In addition it could save your radio clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately yellow blue Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to a metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Fa
270. s but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine After waiting about 15 seconds repeat the normal starting procedure NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle towed see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for
271. s engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index yellow blue Brake Wear Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 6 29 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes See Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and e
272. s the AUTO button when you want the system to automatically adjust to changes in the temperature inside the vehicle the outside temperature and the sun load on the vehicle When the system is set for automatic operation air will come from the floor middle or windshield outlets depending on the temperature inside the vehicle the outside temperature and sun load Fan speed will vary as the system gets to and maintains the comfort setting you have selected through the use of the TEMP button To find your comfort setting start with the system in AUTO mode and the TEMP button adjusted to 75 F 24 C give the vehicle about 20 minutes to stabilize and adjust your comfort setting if necessary by using the TEMP button The display will show the comfort setting for a few seconds and then it will display the outside temperature If you want to see your current automatic fan speed airflow direction and comfort setting press the AUTO button In cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan to avoid blowing cold air The length of the delay depends on the engine coolant temperature and the outside temperature Pushing the FAN AIR FLOW or FRONT buttons will override this delay turn off the AUTO setting and change the fan speed yellow blue Manual Operation You may also manually adjust the air delivery or fan speed AIR FLOW This button is used to change the direction of the airflow The airflow choices available are FLOOR
273. s to start your vehicle again or uses another key during this time the vehicle will not start This discourages someone from randomly trying different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match 2 18 yellow blue The ignition key must be clean and dry before it s inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start If the engine does not start and the SECURITY light turns on the key may be dirty or wet Turn the ignition off Clean and dry the key Wait about three minutes and try again If the starter still won t work and the key appears to be clean and dry wait about three minutes and try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the starter won t work with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first ignition key may be faulty See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS Key II If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or missing resistor pellet the starter won t work The SECURITY light will flash But you don t have to wait three minutes before trying another ignition key See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS Key II to have a new key made If you re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off Your PASS Key II system however is not working properly and must be servic
274. sound will mute while seeking NEXT 2 Press this button to search for the next selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to work The sound will mute while seeking 3 27 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the previous and next selections on the tape 3 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape reverses P 4 Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape advances SIDE 5 Press this button to change the side of the tape that is playing RAND 6 Press this button to reduce background noise The double D symbol will appear in the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation SOURCE Press this button to change to the tape or disc function when the radio is on If both a tape and a disc are installed the system will first go to tape play TAPE SIDE and an arrow will appear on the display If SOURCE is pressed again the system will go to disc play CD PLAY will appear on the display 3 28 yellow blue EJECT The system has two EJECT buttons
275. ssette Tape Player e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate NOTICE properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every Before you add any sound equipment to your 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without telephone or two way radio be sure you can resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on add what you want If you can it s very the display your cassette tape player needs to be important to do it properly Added sound cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as equipment may interfere with the operation of soon as possible 1O preven damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly your vehicle s engine Delco Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the in sound quality clean the tape player
276. stem 0 000000000 2 9 Personal Choice Features 0 000 2 10 Remote saene Beasties DEDE COSE Oui ecd ons 2 9 KEYS EMT 2 2 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Las Certification cce ve ina ODER eae eee 4 30 Certification Tire spe ser 0 0 eee eee eee 4 30 Service Parts Identification 0 6 57 Tire Loading Information suus 4 30 Vehicle Identification Number 6 57 Lamps P BES 2 40 Courtesy i eg p re ee EE REI E RE LEES 2 43 Entry Lighting Delayed 0 2 43 Exit Lighting Delayed 00 2 43 Exterior i2 c i rin ee RR TAGEEDR E BIS oa 2 40 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 2 43 InterlOP sase tinerea eua ER CEPERANT WES 2 43 On Reminder susse ees 0 0 0 0 cece eee reri 2 41 Perimeter Lighting 0 000 e eee eee ee 2 44 Theater Dimming esses 2 43 Leaving Your Vehicle 0 00 0 e eee eee 2 9 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running 2 29 Light Sensor Twilight Sentinel 2 42 Lightet aos ecce qnt ober otia andere cuta 2 52 Lights Air Bag Readiness 00 00 0000s 1 20 2 60 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 2 62 4 7 Battery Warning 00 ee eee ee eae 2 60 Brake System Warning 000 000 0000 2 61 Change Oil Soon 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 2 69 Check Bn gin
277. sure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 15 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 16 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL COLD mark 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off 5 18 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more o
278. surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid yellow blue Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 15 Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead Inremote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may
279. system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 32 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details yellow blue Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires
280. t all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system 6 28 yellow blue If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system When your brake fluid falls to a low level your brake warning light will come on A chime will sound if you try to drive with this warning light on See Brake System Warning Light in the Index What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Maintenance Schedule Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such a
281. t coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 31 Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle see the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 32 yellow blue It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking b
282. t even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push yellow blue Anti Lock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking
283. t your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking NEXT 2 Press this button to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the previous and next selections on the disc yellow blue lt lt 3 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track You will hear sound P 4 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track You will hear sound RAND 6 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Press RAND again to turn off random play RECALL Press this button to see which track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the RECALL button until you see the display you want then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player SOURCE Press this button to change to the disc function when the
284. tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOLUME FADE BAL BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is off first press EJECT or RECALL yellow blue Your tape bias is set automatically If E and a number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error E10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press this button to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to work The
285. terials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you yellow blue Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Buick will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 6 55 yellow blue GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 1052918 8 oz 0 237 L or All Protectant Protects leather wood acrylics Plexiglas plastic rubber and vinyl 1052925 16 oz 0 473 L Multi Purpose Interior Cleans carpets seats interior trim door panels Cleaner and floor mats See your General Motors Parts Department for these products For exterior use only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panels 6 56 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UXXM072675 ENGINE 1999 ji ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the lega
286. tfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 10 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover yellow blue ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 against the original order soon Car amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair Owner s Manual In Portfolio d Owner s Manual Without Portfolio NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only
287. th plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 23 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful 6 24 yellow blue Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at FULL COLD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank but be careful not to spill it N CAUTION Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure c
288. the entire surface of the center pad of the steering wheel is an active horn switch Press anywhere on the pad to sound the horn 2 33 yellow A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High Low Beam Changer and Passing Signal Windshield Wipers and Washer Cruise Control Turn and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it If the arrows just stay on and don t flash as you signal a turn or a lane change a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your t
289. the key to the RUN should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N position but don t start the engine Without If the starter works in any other position your applying the regular brake try to move the shift vehicle needs service lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle s BTSI needs service 7 35 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 36 yellow blue Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only Tocheck the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release all
290. the rear defogger grid and affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty 3 36 yellow blue If when you turn on your rear window defogger you hear static on your radio station it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged If this is true the grid line must be repaired If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antenna There s a specific location at the middle of the glass near the top of the rear window for you to attach a cellular telephone antenna Be sure the antenna does not touch a grid line First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue f NOTES 3 37 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue NOTES 3 38 yellow blue Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 20 City Driving 4 3 Drunken Driving 4 21 Freeway Driving 4 6 Control of a Vehicle 4 22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 6 Braking 4 23 Highway Hypnosis 4 10 Steering 4 23 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 12 Off Road Recovery 4 25 Winter Driving 4 13 Passing 4 29 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 14 Loss of Control 4 30 Loadi
291. things in the trunk of your vehicle In a trunk put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can of your vehicle NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading Electronic Level Control If Equipped If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes It is automatic you do not need to adjust anything 4 31 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 32 yellow blue Your vehicle can tow a trailer i
292. tion for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Q If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts A Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does safety belts not instead of them Every air bag You get more time to stop You stop over more distance system ever offered for sale has required the use of and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air safety belts make such good sense bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions or the safety belts First Edition for Buick LeSabr
293. tion on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have three more chances eight tries per chance to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer 3 31 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no
294. tlets Move the lever between COOL and WARM to lower or raise the temperature Mode Controls The buttons on your system allow you to choose settings to deliver air through the lower middle or windshield outlets RECIRC Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interior of the vehicle quickly or limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle To turn off RECIRC press the button again If you select FRONT defrost or BLEND while RECIRC is selected the system will automatically turn off RECIRC to prevent fogging First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 VENT This setting directs outside air through the middle instrument panel outlets The air conditioning compressor is not working when VENT is selected HTR This button directs air out of the heater outlets Most of the air will come from the floor outlets while some air will flow through the windshield and side window outlets The air conditioning compressor is not working when HTR is selected BLEND When BLEND is selected the airflow will be split between the windshield and the floor outlets The air conditioning compressor will be operating FRONT This setting directs most of the airflow toward the windshield OFF The ventilation system always allows fresh air to flow through your vehicle when it is moving The system will try to keep the air at a previously chosen t
295. to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in 1 Jack case you need it again 2 Wheel Wrench 3 Wing Bolt NOTICE 4 Tire 5 Cover When the compact spare is installed don t take 6 Bolt your vehicle through an automatic car wash with 0 guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle 5 32 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together NOTICE Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare yellow blue If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transaxle or other p
296. to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions any X 01H0 1106 e 7 Lap Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle tilt the Don t let it get twisted latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle The
297. to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise but this is normal Traction Control System If Equipped Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal yellow blue If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index This light should come on briefly when you start the engine If it stays on or comes on while you are driving there s a problem with your traction control system TRACTION OFF See Traction Control System Warning Light in the Index When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially
298. to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Before shifting out of PARK P you must fully apply your regular brakes Your vehicle can roll CAUTION Continued 2 30 yellow blue If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured If you re pulling a trailer see Pulling a Trailer in the Index Your vehicle has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transaxle in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to the OFF ignition position 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Startthe vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Take your vehicle to an authorized service center as soon as you can yellow blue Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaus
299. tor the ignition key must be in RUN Press and hold the OIL RESET button located in the glove box for at least five seconds but not more than 60 seconds After five seconds the CHANGE OIL SOON light will flash four times and then go off This indicates that the Engine Oil Life Monitor System has been reset What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 15 The air cleaner and filter are on the driver s side of the engine compartment 1 Remove the screws on the air cleaner housing cover yellow Remove the air intake hose that is snapped over the throttle body by pulli
300. toward HIGH If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system use the FRONT button to defog or defrost the windshield By choosing this button the airflow will be directed at the windshield Adjust your comfort level by pressing the TEMP up or down arrow The fan speed will be controlled by the system You can change the fan speed by pressing the top of the FAN button to increase speed and the bottom of the button to decrease speed The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass Press this button to start warming your window To reduce the chance of fogging your windows in cold After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself or pressing the weather using the electronic touch system select HTR button during the heating cycle will turn it off If you to supply air through the floor outlets Then move the need additional warming time push the button again FAN lever to HIGH for a few moments before driving The system will then operate for five minutes before away This will blow moist air from the intake outlets going off by itself toward the floor not the windshield If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system the AUTO setting will do this for you Manual operation of the automatic comfortemp system in the FLOOR mode will also supply air through the floor outlets First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the r
301. try transmitter after shutting the doors If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system see Universal Theft Deterrent in the Index Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle has this option you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle yellow blue Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment This system has a range of about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or
302. uid a rag some winter outer Here are some tips for winter driving clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will V Pavey our yenicle AN coor shaper Wann be driving under severe conditions include a small bag You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags your trunk to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful 4 26 yellow blue What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have traction control keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though your vehicle has a traction control system you
303. ur vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer 8 8 yellow blue Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the
304. ure As necessary caliper pins and knuckle brake pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire rotation Also see your GM dealer s service department or qualified service center for additional information 7 38 yellow blue Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Engine Coolant yellow blue USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 119 Brake Fluid System GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid GM Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transaxle Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Windshield Washer S
305. urn signal yellow blue If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index and for burned out bulbs Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam or high beam to low beam pull the turn signal lever toward you and release it When the high beams are on this light on the instrument panel will also be on 2 35 Windshield Wipers The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the band marked WIPER For a single wiping cycle turn the band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one cycle If you want more cycles hold the band on MIST longer 2 36 yellow blue For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the LO position For high speed wiping turn the band further to HI To stop the wipers turn the band to OFF The wiper speed may be set for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor A circu
306. us to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P 2 29 Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transaxle into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill
307. usted for an easier or more firm setting See your dealer for information Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based
308. ut None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the service station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL F It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner speed up or make a hard stop The gage doesn t go back to EMPTY E when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Warning Light If Equipped If your vehicle has the gage cluster a light near the fuel gage will turn on when you are low on fuel You should 1 2 get more fuel as soon as you can First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 17 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and 3 6 Air Conditioning Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 7 Heating 3 21 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and 3 8 Defogging and Defrosting Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 8 Rear Window Defogger 3 25 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and 3 9 Passenger Control If Equipped Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone 3 10 Ventilation
309. venly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications Your rear drum brakes don t have wear indicators but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise have the rear brake linings inspected immediately Also the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing When you have the front brake pads replaced have the rear brakes inspected too Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 6 30 yellow blue Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake li
310. ves more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish yellow blue NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible 6 53 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plat
311. vice manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 yellow blue Center Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats someone can sit in the center positions When you sit in a center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 25 First Edition for Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual 1999 To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 26 yellow blue Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers
312. ving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years over 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws yellow blue The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during
313. w how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 24 yellow blue Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill Drive in the highest gear possible Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action yellow Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fl
314. y Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 6 months whichever occurs first See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Also see footnote 63 000 Miles 105 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 16 yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 66 000 Miles 110 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Change engine oil and filter or ev
315. y controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts yellow blue Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle 4 33 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Buick Motor Division Customer Relations Center 902 E Hamilton Avenue Flint MI 48550 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908
316. y such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency Hill and Mountain Roads yellow blue Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 4 23 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transaxle These parts can work hard on mountain roads Kno
317. ze your inconvenience If it is determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished yellow blue If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle Off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Buick helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts 8 7 Courtesy Rental Vehicle When yo

Buick 1999 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents